Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual - Document Revision 1 (Release 1000)

NOTICE
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a .pdf file,
some minor font and format changes may occur causing slight variations. When
viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your specific PC or
printer will support all of the fonts or graphics. Therefore, when you view the
document fonts may be substituted and your individual printer may not have the
capability to print the document correctly.

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
INT-1073 (IPK II)
DOCUMENT REVISION 1
(RELEASE 1000)

NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at
any time without notice.
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The
information contained herein is the property of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. and shall not be reproduced
without prior written approval of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a registered trademark of NEC
America, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. AT&T is a registered
trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Company. Lucent Technologies is a trademark or
service mark of Lucent Technologies Inc. Nortel Networks and the Nortel Networks logo are
trademarks of Nortel Networks.
Copyright 2006
NEC Infrontia, Inc.
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Technology Development

Preface
THIS MANUAL
The Programming Manual provides the technician with all of the necessary information for
programming the Electra Elite IPK II system.
Programming can be accomplished using a PC or a Multiline Terminal.
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
Electra Elite IPK II General Description Manual
This Manual provides general information about the system, its features, system configuration and
standards. This manual provides an overview of the Electra Elite IPK II system and can be used to
present information to potential customers.
Electra Elite IPK II System Hardware Manual
The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer. This manual has detailed
instructions for installing the Electra Elite IPK II KSU, ETUs, Multiline Terminals, and optional
equipment.
Electra Elite IPK II Features and Specifications Manual
This manual provides detailed information for each of the system features. If you are not familiar with
the features, the Table of Contents lists each of the features and where to find the feature within the
manual.
Electra Elite IPK II Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Manual
This manual provides information installing and programming the Key-Common Channel Interoffice
Signaling (K-CCIS) System.

___
Do __
cu __
me __
nt __
Re___
visi __
on __
1 ____________________________________________________
E ___
lect __
ra __
Elit __
e I __
PK__
II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
xiv
Table of Contents

Introduction
1
SECTION 1
BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING

Before customizing your system be sure to read this chapter
In
first.
troduc
This chapter provides you with detailed information about the system
t
programs. By changing a program, you change the way the feature
io
associated with that program works. In this chapter, you find out about
n
each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the
program data into system memory.
SECTION 2
HOW TO USE MANUAL
This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program
10-01 is at the beginning of the section and Program 92-01 is at the end.
The information on each program is subdivided into the following
headings:
Description describes what the program options control. The Default
Settings for each program are also included. When you first install the
system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs. Along with the
Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special
considerations that may apply to the program.
The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the Description heading is
the program's access level. You can only use the program if your access
level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. Refer to Section 3
How to Enter Programming Mode on page 1-2 for a list of the system
access levels and passwords.
Programming
1 - 1

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the
program. You will want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a
program. Customizing a feature may have an effect on another feature that you did
not intend.
Telephone Programming Instructions shows how to enter the program data into
system memory. For example:
1.
Enter the programming mode.
2.
15-07-01
15-07-01 TEL
KY01 = *01

tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial
pad. After you do, you will see the message "15-07-01 TEL" on the first line of
the telephone display. This indicates the program number (15-07), item number
(01), and that the options are being set for the extension . The second row of the
display "KY01 = *01" indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry
of *01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right, depending
on which arrow is pressed. To learn how to enter the programming mode, refer
to Section 3 How to Enter Programming Mode below.
SECTION 3
HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE
To enter programming mode:
1.
Go to any working display telephone.

In a newly installed system, use extension (port 1).
2.
Do not lift the handset.
3.
Press Speaker.
4.
# , # , .
Password
5.
Dial the system password + Transfer.
Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the
passwords, use 90-02 : Programming Password Setup.
1 - 2
Introduction

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
User
Password
Level
Programs at this Level
Name
47544
necii
1 (MF)
Manufacturer (MF):
All programs
12345678
tech
2 (IN)
Installation (IN):
All programs in this section not listed below for SA and
SB
0000
ADMIN1
3 (SA)
System Administrator - Level 1 (SA):
10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17,
10-18, 10-22, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 15-01, 15-07, 15-09,
15-10, 15-11, 20-16, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11, 25-08,
30-03, 32-02, 40-02, 41-02, 41-03, 41-04, 41-05, 41-06,
41-07, 41-08, 41-09, 41-10, 41-11, 41-12, 41-13, 41-14,
41-15, 41-16, 41-17, 41-18, 90-03, 90-04, 90-06, 90-07,
90-18, 90-19
9999
ADMIN2
4 (SB)
System Administrator - Level 2 (SB):
13-04, 13-05, 13-06
SECTION 4
HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
To exit the programming mode:
When you are done programming, you must be out of a program's options to exit
(pressing the Answer key will exit the program's option).
1.
Press Answer key to exit the program's options, if needed.
Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2
2.
Press Speaker. If changes were to the system programming, "Saving System
Data" is displayed.
3.
The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and exits the
telephone to an idle mode.

To save a customer's database, a blank Compact Flash (CF) is required. Insert the CF
into the CPUII and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the Compact Flash.
(Program 90-04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary.) Note that a Compact
Flash can only hold one customer database. Each database to be saved will require its
own separate card.
Programming
1 - 3

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
SECTION 5
USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS
Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter
data, edit data and move around in the menus.
Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data
Keys for Entering Data
Use this key...
When you want to...
0~9 and ,
Enter data into a program.
TRANSFER
Complete the programming step you just made (e.g., pressing Enter
on a PC keyboard). When a program entry displays, press
TRANSFER to bypass the entry without changing it.
CONF
Delete the entry to the left (e.g., pressing Backspace on a PC
keyboard).
HOLD
Delete or clear all characters to the right of the cursor.
ANSWER
Exit one step at a time from the program window currently being
viewed.
For example, if programming item 5 in 15-03, pressing ANSWER
allows you to enter a new option in program 15-03. Pressing
ANSWER again allows you to select a new program in the 15-XX
series. Pressing ANSWER a third time allows you to enter a new
program beginning with 1. Pressing ANSWER one last time brings
you to the beginning program display, allowing you to enter any
program number.
REDIAL
Switch between the different input data fields by pressing REDIAL.
The cursor moves up to the top row of the display. Pressing REDIAL
again moves the cursor back to the middle row.
LINE KEYS
Use pre-programmed settings to help with the program entry. These
settings vary between programs from LINE 1 = 0 (off) and LINE 2 = 1
(on) to preset values for timers where LINE 1 = 5, LINE 2 = 10, LINE
3 = 15, etc.
For programs with this option, the line key, which currently matches
the programmed setting, lights steady.
The display can also indicate Softkey, which will allow you to select
the values as well (-1 and +1 will step through these pre-programmed
settings.)
LINE KEY 1
Program a pause into an Speed Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 2
Program a recall/flash into an Speed Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 3
Program an @ into an Speed Dialing bin.
1 - 4
Introduction

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data (Continued)
Keys for Entering Data
Use this key...
When you want to...
VOL L
Scroll backward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension
etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).
If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data
before scrolling forward.
VOL M
Scroll forward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension
etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).
If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data
before scrolling backward.
SECTION 6
PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES
Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages) require you
to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the
keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second
character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press the key 2 three times. Press the key
six times to display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits long.
Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names
Use this keypad digit . . .
When you want to. . .
1
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } Æ ¨ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
2
Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
Programming
1 - 5

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names
Use this keypad digit . . .
When you want to. . .
,
Enter characters:
, + , - . / : ; < = > ? B E S ¢ £
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same
key are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In
system programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey
instead to accept and/or add a space.)
CONF
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to
the right.
SECTION 7
USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING
Each Electra Elite IPK II display telephone provides interactive Softkeys for intuitive
feature access. The options for these keys will automatically change depending on
where you are in the system programming. Simply press the Softkey located below
the option you wish and the display will change accordingly.
_
Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2

Pressing the VOLUME L or VOLUME M will scroll between the menus.
_
Program Mode
CCIS Hard Mtnance

1 - 6
Introduction

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
SECTION 8
WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN
When using a display telephone in programming mode, various Softkey options are
displayed. These keys will allow you to easily select, scan, or move through the
programs.
Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts
Softkey Display Prompts
If you press this
The system will. . .
Softkey . . .
back
Go back one step in the program display.
You can press VOLUME L or VOLUME M to scroll forward or
backward through a list of programs.

Scroll down through the available programs.

Scroll up through the available programs.
select
Select the currently displayed program.

Move the cursor to the left.

Move the cursor to the right.
-1
Move back through the available program options.
+1
Move forward through the available program options.
Programming
1 - 7

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
SECTION 9
SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES
The following table provides the capacities for the Electra Elite IPK II system.
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
Number Plan/Capacities
System
Analog Caller ID Detector
64
Classes of Service
15
Day/Night Mode Numbers
8
Day/Night Service Patterns
32
Dial Tone Detector
64
DTMF Receiver
Toll Restriction Classes
15
Verifiable Account Code Table
2000
Trunk
Trunk Port Number
1~200
Trunk Ports (Total):
200
H
Analog Trunks
184
H
BRI Trunk Ports
184
H
T1/PRI Trunk Ports
200
H
E&M Analog Trunk Ports
46
H
DID Analog Trunk Ports
92
H
VoIP Trunk Ports
184 if IAD
200 is PVA
DID Translation Tables
20
DID Translation Table Entries
2000
DISA:
H
Classes of Service
15
H
Users
1~15
Ring Groups
1~100
Tie Line Classes of Service
15
Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes
15
Trunk Access Maps
1~200
Trunk Group Numbers
1~100
1 - 8
Introduction

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
Number Plan/Capacities
Trunk Routes
1~100
Extension
Telephone Extension Port Numbers
1~256
H
Multiline Terminals
(1~240)
H
Single Line Phones/Analog Devices
(1~184)
H
VoIP Extensions
(1~256)
H
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless
256
Extension Ports (Total):
H
Multiline Terminals
240
H
Single Line Phones/Analog Devices
184
ESIU:
H
Physical Ports
01~16
SLIU:
H
Physical Ports
01~16
Telephone Extension Number Range
1~99999999
Virtual Extension Ports
256
Virtual Extension Port Numbers
001~256
Virtual Extension Number Range
Undefined
PGD(2)-U10 Modules
56
ADA (Recording Jack) Adapters
240
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless DECT Base Stations
16
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless DECT Telephones
256
Door Boxes
8
Door Box Numbers
1~8
DSS Consoles Numbers:
H
60 Button DSS Console
32
Operator Access Number
0
Operator Extension
1
Ringdown Assignments
512
SLT Adapters
16
HF-R Adapters
240
Programming
1 - 9

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
Number Plan/Capacities
Speed Dialing
Speed Dialing Groups
64
Speed Dialing Bins
0~1999
Speed Dialing Table-Common
1000
ACD
ACD Groups
64
ACD Agent Extensions
256
ACI
ACI Groups
16
ACI Ports
96
Automated Attendant
VRS Message Numbers
1~48
Conference
Conference Circuits
64 - maximum
(32 Parties Per Conference)
Data Communication Interfaces
APR Software Port Numbers
193~256
APA Adapters
240
APR Adapters
240
CTA or CTU Adapters
32
Department and Pickup Groups
Department (Extension) Group Numbers
1~64
Call Pickup Group Numbers
1~64
Hotline
Internal Hotline
512
External Hotline
512
1 - 10
Introduction

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
Number Plan/Capacities
Paging and Park
Internal Page Group Numbers
0, 1~9 or 01~64
External Page Group Numbers
0, 1~8
External Speakers
9
H
CPU II( )-U10
(1)
H
PGD(2)-U10 Module
(1~8)
Park Group Numbers
1~64
Park Orbits
1~64
SMDR
SMDR Ports
1~8
VRS
VRS (on DSP Daughter Board)
1
VRS Channels
16
VRS Attendant Messages
3
VRS Recordable Messages
48
Voice Mail
Ports for IPK II In-Mail
8
Ports for External Voice Mail
48
VoIP
ADA2 (Recording Jack) Adapters
240
IP Adapters
256
PSA (Power Failure) Adapters
256
RTP Ports
0~65535
RTCP Ports
0~65535
DSP Resources
01~208
Programming
1 - 11

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
Number Plan/Capacities
Passwords
Programming Passwords:
Level 1 (MF)
47544
PCPro/WebPro User Name:
necii
Level 2 (IN)
12345678
PCPro/WebPro User Name:
tech
Level 3 (SA)
0000
PCPro/WebPro User Name:
ADMIN1
Level 4 (SB)
9999
PCPro/WebPro User Name:
ADMIN2
Programming Password Users
8
Footnotes
Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long. Refer to the Flexible System Numbering
feature in the Electra Elite IPK II Features and Specifications manual.
1 - 12
Introduction

Programming the Electra Elite IPK II
2
SECTION 1
PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM
The information contained in this chapter provides the information
necessary to properly program your Electra Elite IPK II system.
Pr
The programming blocks are organized into the following programming
o
modes.
gra
Table 2-1 Programming Modes
m
Program Number : Program Name
min
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
g
Program 11 : System Numbering
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
Program 13 : Speed Dialing
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
Program 20 : System Option Setup
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
Program 26 : ARS Service
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup (no Programs 27~29)
Program 31 : Paging Setup
Programming
2 - 1

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-1 Programming Modes (Continued)
Program Number : Program Name
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
Program 40 : Voice Recording System (no Programs 36~39)
Program 41 : ACD Setup
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup (no Program 43)
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
Program 47 : In-Mail (no Program 46)
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service (CCIS)
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System (no Programs 48, 49, 51~79)
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
Program 83 : Hardware Setup for IPK II Wireless
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup
Program 90 : Maintenance Program (no Programs 86~89)
Program 91 : IPK II Wireless DECT PS Entry
Program 92 : Copy Program
2 - 2
Programming the Electra Elite IPK II

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the system Time and Date
through system programming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 728
to change the Time if allowed by an extension's Class of Service.
Program
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
10
01
Year
00~99
No Setting
Enter two digits for year (00~99).
02
Month
01~12
No Setting
Enter two digits (01~12) for the
month.
03
Day
01~31
No Setting
Enter two digits (01~31) for the day.
04
Week
1~7
No Setting
Enter digit for the day of the week
(Sun~Sat)
(1=Sunday, 7=Saturday).
05
Hour
00~23
No Setting
Enter two digits for the hour (00~23).
06
Minute
00~59
No Setting
Enter two digits for the minute
(00~59).
07
Second
00~59
No Setting
Enter two digits for the second
(00~59).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Clock/Calendar Display
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 3

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-02 : Location Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed system.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
01
Country Code
Dial (up to 4 digits)
1
Enter the country code.
0~9, ,, #
02
International
Dial (up to 4 digits)
-
Enter the international access
Access Code
0~9, ,, #
code.
03
Other Area
Dial (up to 2 digits)
9
Enter the other area access code
Access Code
0~9, ,, #
04
Area Code
Dial (up to 6 digits)
-
Enter the local area code.
0~9, ,, #
05
Trunk Access
Dial (up to 8 digits):
-
Enter the trunk access code digits
Code
0~9, #, ,
required to place an outgoing call.
This is the code which will be
added to the Caller ID information
for incoming trunk calls to allow
the call to dial out if allowed in
20-19-03.
IMPORTANT
Program 10-02-05 is only
supported by telephone
programming. PCPro and WebPro
cannot edit this option.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 4
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : ETU Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-03 : ETU Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data
for each ETU. When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to `0' and then
plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it or you may have to
reseat the ETU.

The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.

The item numbers indicated below are different when using PCPro/WebPro due to
the window layout of the applications. Refer to the program within the PCPro/
WebPro application to determine the correct item number.
Input Data
For CNF PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
01~16
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Logical Port Number
0~256
0
For CCISoIP PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
01~24
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Logical Port Number
0~200
0
The start port number of a T1 line is
displayed. 24 logic ports are
automatically assigned to a DTI (T1)
line.
02
T1 Signal Format Selection
0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame)
1
1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame)
03
Clear Channel Selection
0
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 5

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
04
Line Length Selection
0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet
0
1 = 134 feet ~ 266 feet
2 = 267 feet ~ 399 feet
3 = 400 feet ~ 533 feet
4 = 534 feet ~ 655 feet
For MG 16 PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
0
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Logical Port Number
0~256
0

For ESI PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
01~16
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Terminal Type (B1)
0
= Not set
0
1
= Multiline Terminal
2
= SLT Adapter
3
= -- Not Used --
4
= -- Not Used --
5
= -- Not Used --
6
= PGD (Paging)
7
= PGD (Tone Ringer)
8
= PG D (Doorbox)
9
= PG D (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used --
02
Logical Port Number (B1)
0
= Not set
0
1
= Multiline Terminal
2
= SLT Adapter
3
= Not Used
4
= Not Used
5
= 2DCI Adapter 1~32
6
= PGD (Paging)
7
= PGD (for Tone Ringer) 1~4 or 1~8
8
= PGD (for Door Box) 1~4 or 1~8
9
= PGD (for Analog I/F) 1~8 or 1~96
10 = DSS
11 = -- Not Used --
03
--- Not Used ---
2 - 6
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
04
Optional Installed Unit 1
0
= None
0
1
= AP R Module
2
= APA Module
3
= AD A Module
4
= CTA/CTU Module
05
Optional Installed Unit 2
0
= None
0
1
= AP R Module
2
= APA Module
3
= AD A Module
4
= CTA/CTU Module
B-Channel 2
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
06
Terminal Type (B2)
0
= Not set
0
6
= PGD (Paging)
7
= PGD (Tone Ringer)
8
= PGD (Door Box)
9
= PG D (ACI)
12 = APR
07
Logical Port Number (B2)
PGD (Paging/Tone Ringer) = 1-PGmax
PGD (for Door Box) = 1-DBmax
PGD (Analog I/F) = 1-ACImax
APR (for B2 mode) 193~256
For SLI PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
01~08
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Logical Port Number
0~256
0
02
--- Not Used ---
03
Transmit Gain Level (S-Level)
1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB)
32 (0dB)
04
Receive Gain Level (R-Level)
1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB)
32 (0dB)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 7

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
For COIU Unit Setup
Physical Port Number
01~08
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Logical Port Number
0~200
0
For TLI PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
01~02
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Logical Port Number
0~200
0
For DID PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
01~04
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Logical Port Number
0~200
0
For OPX PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
01~08
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Logical Port Number
0~256
0
2 - 8
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
For BRI PKG Setup
ISDN Line Number
01~08
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No
01
--- Not Used ---
02
Logical Port Number
0 = Net Set
0
The starting port number of a BRI
1 = For T-Bus (1~200)
line is displayed. Two logic ports are
2 = For S-Bus (1~256)
automatically assigned to a BRI line.
03
Connection Type
0
= Point-to-Multipoint (not
0
available for Networking)
1
= Point-to-Point
04
Layer 3 Timer Type
1~5
1
Each timer value of Layer 3 are set
up for every type using
Program 81-06 (T-Bus)
05
CLIP Information Announcement
0
= Disable
1
Based on this setting, the system will
1
= Enable
include a "Presentation Allowed" (1) or
"Presentation Restricted" (0) in the
Setup message to allow or deny the
Calling Party Number. Program
15-01-04 must also be set to a `1' if this
option is enabled.
06
--- Not Used ---
07
--- Not Used ---
08
Dial Sending Mode
0
= Enblock Sending
1
1
= Overlap Sending
09
Dial Information Element
0
= Keypad Facility
(Only when Dialing Sending Mode (10-
1
= Called Party Number
03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap Sending)
10
--- Not Used ---
11
--- Not Used ---
12
--- Not Used ---
13
--- Not Used ---
14
--- Not Used ---
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 9

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
For PRI PKG Setup
ISDN Line Number
01~24
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
--- Not Used ---
02
Logical Port Number
1
= for T-Bus 1~200
1
The start port number of a PRI line is
displayed. 24 logic ports are
automatically assigned to a PRI line.
03
--- Not Used ---
04
Layer 3 Timer Type
1~5
1
Each timer value of Layer 3 is set up
for each type in
Program 81-06 (T-Bus)
05
CLIP Information
0
= Disable
1
Based on this setting, the system
1
= Enable
will include a "Presentation Allowed"
(1) or "Presentation Restricted" (0)
in the Setup message to allow or
deny the Calling Party Number.
Program 15-01-04 must also be set
to a `1' if this option is enabled.
06
Length of Cable
0
= 0 ~ 40m
0
1
= 41~ 80m
2
= 81~ 121m
3
= 122 ~ 162m
4
= 163 ~ 200m
07
--- Not Used ---
08
Dial Sending Mode
0
= Enblock Sending
1
1
= Overlap Sending
09
Dial Information Element
0
= Keypad Facility
(Only when Dialing Sending Mode
1
= Called Party Number
(10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap
Sending)
10
--- Not Used ---
11
--- Not Used ---
12
Short / Long-Haul
0
= Short-Haul
0
1
= Long-Haul
2 - 10
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
13
Loss-Of-Signal Detection Limit
In Short-Haul Mode:
0
0
= 0.91V
1
= 0.74V
2
= 0.59V
3
= 0.42V
4
= 0.32V
5
= 0.21V
6
= 0.16V
7
= 0.10V
In Long-Haul Mode:
0
= 1.70V
1
= 0.84V
2
= 0.84V
3
= 0.45V
4
= 0.45V
5
= 0.20V
6
= 0.10V
7
= Not Defined
14
--- Not Used ---
For DTI (T1) PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
01~24
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Logical Port Number
0~200
0
The start port number of a T1 line is
displayed. 24 logic ports are
automatically assigned to a DTI (T1)
line.
02
T1 Signal Format Selection
0
= D4 (12 Multi Frame)
1
1
= ESF (24 Multi Frame)
03
Clear Channel Selection
0
04
Line Length Selection
0
= 0 feet ~ 133 feet
0
1
= 134 feet ~ 266 feet
2
= 267 feet ~ 399 feet
3
= 400 feet ~ 533 feet
4
= 534 feet ~ 655 feet
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 11

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
05
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
0
= CO
0
1
= E&M
2
= DID
3
= ANI
For VMS/FMS PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
01~16
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Logical Port Number
0~256
0
Conditions
H When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to `0' and then plug the
new device in to have the system automatically define it or redefine the type
manually.
H The system must have a ETU installed in order to view/change the options for that
type of ETU.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Universal Slots
2 - 12
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-04 : Music On Hold Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold (MOH) source.
For internal Music on Hold, the system can provide a service tone callers on hold or
one of eleven synthesized selections.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
01
Music on Hold
0 = No Tone
2
The Music on Hold (MOH)
Source Selection
1 = External MOH
source can be internal
(synthesized) or from a
2 = Service Tone
customer-provided music
source.
The customer-provided source
can connect to a PGD(2)-U10
ADP or the connector on the
side of the Base Cabinet's
MOH/IN connection.
Trunk MOH and Extension
MOH music source use the
same Music on Hold source.
02
--- Not Used ---
03
Audio Gain Setup
1-63 (-15.5 +15.5dB)
32
(0dB)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
J Background Music
J Music on Hold
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 13

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup to define which Relay circuits
(5~8) on PGD(2)-U10 Adapter are used for General Purpose Relay.
Input Data
- INDEX-1 -
General Purpose Relay No.
1~8
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Slot No.
Slot No: 0~16
0 - 0 - 0
Physical Port of ESIU
ESIU Port: 0~16
Sensor circuit No.
Relay No: 0, 5~8
After each entry,
pressing the
Transfer Key will
advance to the
next entry.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 14
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup
Level:
IN
Description
J
Use Program 10-06 : ISDN - BRI Setup to configure the ISDN - BRI's Terminal
Endpoint Identifier (TEI), mode of operation, and Service Profile Identifier
(SPID) number for each circuit's B-Channels.
Input Data
ISDN - BRI Circuit
1 ~ 4
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
TEI Selection
0 = Select by SPID number
0
Selects the method the
1 = Route by Redirecting Number
system will use when
assigning Terminal
Endpoint Identifier (TEI)
values to BRI ports.
02
DID Mode
0 = Route by Called Party Number
0
1 = Route by Redirecting Number
03
SPID 1
Dial up to 20 digits
04
SPID 2
Dial up to 20 digits
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
ISDN Compatibility
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 15

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-08 : Ringing Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-08 : Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk calls.
This sets how a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing
occurs as soon as the trunk's LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with the
normal ring cadence cycle. Without pre-ringing, the call starts ringing only when the
normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This may cause a ring delay, depending on when
call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle.
Input Data
Item
Description
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Ringing Setup
0 = Disable
0
1 = Enable
Conditions
H Used with Analog Trunks only.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Central Office Calls, Answering
J
Synchronous Ringing
2 - 16
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on
the CPUII for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The CPUII has 16 circuits
initially. On the Electra Elite IPK II, with additional PGD(2)-U10 ADPs installed, the
system can provide a total of 64 circuits (32 + 32). These are used as follows:
J
Extension
DTMF receiver for single line telephone
J
Trunk
DTMF receiver for analog trunks, dial tone & busy tone detection
for analog trunks
Input Data
Circuit/Resource Number
01~64
Item
Input Data
Default Setting
No.
01
0 = Common Use
Circuit/Resource 01-08: 1 (Extension Only)
1 = Extension Only
Circuit/Resource 09-32: 2 (Trunk Only)
2 = Trunk Only
Circuit/Resource 33-64: 0 (Common Use)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Caller ID
J
Central Office Calls, Placing
J
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
J
Tie Lines
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 17

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-12 : CPUII Network Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-12 : CPUII Network Setup to setup the IP Address, Subnet-Mask,
and Default Gateway addresses.
Caution! If any of the IPK Address or NIC settings are changed, the system
must be reset in order for the changes to take affect.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Conditions
No.
01
IP Address
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
172.16.0.10
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
02
Subnet Mask
128.0.0.0
192.0.0.0
224.0.0.0
255.255.0.0
The setting of
240.0.0.0
248.0.0.0
252.0.0.0
Subnet-Mask is
254.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
255.128.0.0
invalid when all Host
Address are 0.
255.192.0.0
255.224.0.0
255.248.0.0
255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0
If the network
255.255.128.0
255.255.192.0
255.255.224.0
section is:
255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0
255.255.254.0
0,
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192
127
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248
128.0
255.255.255.252
255.255.255.254
255.255.255.255
191.255
192.0.0
223.255.255
The setting of
Subnet-Mask is
invalid.
03
Default Gate-
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
IP Address for
way
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
Router.
192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
2 - 18
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data (Continued)
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Conditions
No.
04
Time Zone
0~24 (0 = -12 Hours and 24 = +12 Hours)
+7 Hours
Determine the offset
from Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT)
time. Then enter its
respective value. For
example, Eastern
Time (US and
Canada) has a GMT
offset of -5. The
program data would
then be 7 (0= -12, 1=
-11, 2= -10, 3= -9, 4=
-8, 5= -7, 6= -6,
7= -5, ......24= +12)
05
NIC Interface
0 = Auto Detect
0
NIC Auto Negotiate
1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex
08
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
H The system must be reset in order for these changes to take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 19

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the
CPUII.
Caution! The system must be reset in order for these changes to take affect.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
01
DHCP Server
0: Disable
0
Enable or disable the use of the
Mode
1: Enable
built-in DHCP Server.
02
Lease Time
Days 0~255
0 day
Lease Time of the IP address to a
client.
Hour 0~23
0 hour
Note: Pressing the Transfer Key
will increment to the next setting
data.
Minutes 1~59
30 minutes
03
--- Not Used ---
04
Number of
0: Single
0
The number of networks to
Networks
1: Divide Same
manage.
Network
With a single network, select
Single.
When dividing and managing the
same network as multiple
networks, select Divide.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 20
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-14 : Managed Network Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address
which the DHCP Server leases to a client.
Input Data
Scope Number
1~10
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
The range of the IP address to
Minimum:
Scope 1:
10-13-04
lease.
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
172.16.0.100
When "Maximum" has not been
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
entered, the maximum value
Scope 2~10:
equals the minimum value.
192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
0.0.0.0
When Single is selected in
10-13-04, only one scope range
Maximum:
Scope 1:
can be entered.
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
172.16.5.254
When Divide Same Network is
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
selected in 10-13-04, a
Scope 2~10:
maximum of ten scope ranges
192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
can be entered.
0.0.0.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 21

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-15 : Client Information Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when
the DHCP server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients.
Input Data
Client Number
1-10
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
The IP address should be
MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00
00-00-00-00-00-00
assigned out of the scope range
set up in Program 10-14.
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
IP address
0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 22
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-16 : Option Information Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the
DHCP server to each client.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Router
Code number 0~255
3 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
02
DNS Server
Code number 0-255
6 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
03
--- Not Used ---
04
--- Not Used ---
05
MGC
Code number 0-255
129 (Fixed)
IP address
172.16.0.10
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 23

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 24
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/
address/etc. for communicating to external equipment.
Input Data
Type of External Equipment
1
=
CT I Server
2
=
AC D MIS
3
=
N ot Used
4
=
N ot Used
5
=
SMDR
6
=
Reserved
7
=
Reserved
8
=
Reserved
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
TCP Port
0~65535
External Device 1 and 2 = 0
External Device 3 = 0
External Device 4 = 0
External Device 5 = 0
02
--- Not Used ---
03
Keep Alive Time
1~255 (sec)
30
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 25

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-21 : CPUII Hardware Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-21 : CPUII Hardware Setup to set up various hardware, such as
the baud rate of COM port and the switch for control on CPUII.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
01
--- Not Used ---
02
Baud rate for
0 = 4800bps
2
Define the baud
COM Port
1 = 9600bps
rate for COM 1.
2 = 19200bps
3 = 38400bps
4 = 56000bps (set in PCPro only)
5 = 115200bps (set in PCPro only
03
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 26
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight
savings. As the telephone system is used globally, these settings define when the
system should automatically adjust for daylight savings as it applies to the region in
which the system is installed.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Daylight Savings Mode
0 = Disable
1
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system's
1 = Enable
ability to adjust the time for daylight
savings/standard time.
02
Time for Daylight Savings
0000~2359
0200
Enter the time of day the system should
adjust for daylight savings time.
03
Start of Month (Summer Time)
1~12
4
Enter the month of system should adjust
the time for daylight savings time (01~12).
04
Start of Week
0 = Last Week of Month
1
Enter the week of the month the system
1 ~ 5
should adjust the time for daylight savings
time (0 = last week of the month or 1~5).
05
Start of Week Day
1~7
1
(Sun=1, Mon=2, etc.)
Enter the day of the week the system
should adjust the time for daylight savings
time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).
06
End of Month
1~12
10
Enter the month of system should adjust
the time for standard time (01~12).
07
End of Week
0 = Last Week of Month
0
Enter the week of the month the system
1~5
should adjust the time for standard time
(0 = last week of the month or 1~5).
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 27

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Input Data (Continued)
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
08
End of Week Day
1~7
1
(Sun=1, Mon=2, etc.)
Enter the day of the week the system
should adjust the time for daylight savings
time
(01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Clock/Calendar Display
2 - 28
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-38 : BGM Resource Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-38 : BGM Resource Setup to configure the Background Music
Source input.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
BGM Resource Type
0 = CPUII (MOH/IN)
0
1 = ACI Port
02
ACI Port Number for BGM Source
0 ~ 96
0
(only used if 10-38-01 is set to 1)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
J
Background Music
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 29

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 30
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system's internal (Intercom)
numbering plan. The numbering plan assigns the first and second digits dialed
and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other extensions
Program
and features, such as service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering
plan does not meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system
numbering to the site.
11
CAUTION!
Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system
operation. Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering
plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering, use
the chart for Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings on
page 2-33 to keep careful and accurate records of your changes.
Before changing your numbering plan, use the PC Program or Web PC
Program to make a backup copy of your system data.
Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps:
Step 1: Enter the digit(s) you want to change
You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in
the Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-33 table, the nX
rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12,
etc.) are for two digit codes.
J
Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with
that digit. For example, entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning
with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire
range of numbers beginning with 6. (For example, if you enter 3 in step 2
the entries affected would be 600-699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the
entries affected would be 6000-6999.)
J
Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user
dials. For example, entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes
beginning with 60. In the default program, only * and # use 2-digit codes. All
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 31

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
the other codes are single digit. If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9, be
sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range as
well. This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9
are undefined.
Step 2: Specify the length of the code you want to change
After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits
comprise the code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the Table 2-2
System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-33 table. In the default program, all
codes from 100-999 are three digits long. Codes beginning with 0 are one digit long.
Codes beginning with , are 3 digits long and codes beginning with # are 4 digits long.
Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected
After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is
the Dial Type column in the Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings on page
2-33 table. The choices are:
Dial
Dial Type Description
Related Program
Types
0
--- Not Used ---
1
Service Code
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Registration)
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for HOTEL)
11-15 : Service Code Setup (Special access)
11-16 : Service Code Setup (Single Digit)
2
Extension Number
11-02 : Extension Numbers
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbers
11-06 : PGD(2)-U10 (ACI) Extension Numbers
11-07 : Department Calling Group Numbers
11-08 : PGD(2)-U10 (ACI) Group Pilot Numbers
3
Trunk Access Code
11-09 : Trunk Access Code
4
Special Trunk Access
11-09 : Trunk Access Code
5
Operator Access
20-17 : Operator's Extension
6
ARS/F-Route Access
44-xx
Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system
operates. Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100-399. In order
to make extension numbers correspond to room numbers, you should use Program 11-02 to
reassign extension numbers on each floor from 100 to 399. (Other applications might also
require you to change entries in Program 11-10 through 11-16.)
2 - 32
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default
See the following tables for default settings.
Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits
Dial Type
Required
Default
New
Default
New
1X
3
2
11
0
0
12
0
0
13
0
0
14
0
0
15
0
0
16
0
0
17
0
0
18
0
0
19
0
0
10
0
0
1,
0
0
1#
0
0
2X
3
2
21
0
0
22
0
0
23
0
0
24
0
0
25
0
0
26
0
0
27
0
0
28
0
0
29
0
0
20
0
0
2,
0
0
2#
0
0
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 33

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits
Dial Type
Required
Default
New
Default
New
3X
4
2
31
0
0
32
0
0
33
0
0
34
0
0
35
0
0
36
0
0
37
0
0
38
0
0
39
0
0
30
0
0
3,
0
0
3#
0
0
4X
0
1
41
0
0
42
0
0
43
0
0
44
0
0
45
0
0
46
0
0
47
0
0
48
0
0
49
0
0
40
0
0
4,
0
0
4#
0
0
2 - 34
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits
Dial Type
Required
Default
New
Default
New
5X
3
1
51
0
0
52
0
0
53
0
0
54
0
0
55
0
0
56
0
0
57
0
0
58
0
0
59
0
0
50
0
0
5,
0
0
5#
0
0
6X
3
1
61
0
0
62
0
0
63
0
0
64
0
0
65
0
0
66
0
0
67
0
0
68
0
0
69
0
0
60
0
0
6,
0
0
6#
0
0
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 35

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits
Dial Type
Required
Default
New
Default
New
7X
3
2
71
0
0
72
0
0
73
0
0
74
0
0
75
0
0
76
0
0
77
0
0
78
0
0
79
0
0
70
0
0
7,
0
0
7#
0
0
8X
1
1
81
0
0
82
0
0
83
0
0
84
0
0
85
0
0
86
0
0
87
0
0
88
0
0
89
0
0
80
0
0
8,
0
0
8#
0
0
2 - 36
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits
Dial Type
Required
Default
New
Default
New
9X
1
3
91
0
0
92
0
0
93
0
0
94
0
0
95
0
0
96
0
0
97
0
0
98
0
0
99
0
0
90
0
0
9,
0
0
9#
0
0
0X
1
5
01
0
0
02
0
0
03
0
0
04
0
0
05
0
0
06
0
0
07
0
0
08
0
0
09
0
0
00
0
0
0,
0
0
0#
0
0
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 37

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits
Dial Type
Required
Default
New
Default
New
,X
2
1
,1
0
0
,2
0
0
,3
0
0
,4
0
0
,5
0
0
,6
0
0
,7
0
0
,8
0
0
,9
0
0
,0
0
0
,,
0
0
,#
0
0
#X
0
0
#1
2
1
#2
2
1
#3
2
1
#4
2
1
#5
2
1
#6
2
1
#7
2
1
#8
2
1
#9
2
1
#0
2
1
#,
4
1
##
2
1
2 - 38
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Flexible System Numbering
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 39

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-02 : Extension Numbering
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension
number can be up to eight digits long. The first/second digit(s) of the number should
be assigned in Program 11-01. This lets an employee move to a new location (port)
and retain the same extension number.
Input Data
Extension Port Number
001 ~ 256
Item
Extension
Description
No.
Number
01
Dial
H
Set up extension numbers for Multiline telephones, single line
(Up to 8 digits)
telephones (Including SLTII Adapter, APR), and IP telephones.
H
Extension number assignments cannot be duplicated in Programs
11-02, 11-06, 11-07, and 11-08.
Default
Extension Port
Extension
Number
Number
1
101
2
102
3
103

~
99
199
100
3101
~
~
256
3257
2 - 40
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Department Calling
J
Flexible System Numbering
J
Intercom
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 41

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension
numbers. The extension number can be up to eight digits long. The first/second
digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01.
Input Data
Virtual Extension Numbers
001~256
Item
Virtual Extension
Description
No.
Number
01
Dial (up to 8 digits)
Set up Virtual Extension Numbers.
The extension number cannot be duplicated
in Programs 11-02, 11-06, 11-07 and 11-08.
Default
Virtual Port
Extension
Number
Number
1
201
2
202
3
203

~
99
299
100
3301
~
~
256
3457
2 - 42
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Flexible System Numbering
J
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 43

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension number
to be used for the ACI. The extension number can be up to eight digits long. The first/
second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01.
Input Data
ACI Port Number
01~96
ACI
Item
Extension
Description
Related Program
No.
Number
01
Dial
The extension number cannot be
10-03 : Basic
(up to 8 digits)
duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-04,
Configuration for each
11-07 and 11-08.
ETU.
Default
H ACI Port Numbers have no extension number set.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
J
Flexible System Numbering
2 - 44
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign pilot numbers to each
Department Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users
dial for Department Calling and Department Step Calling. The pilot number can be up
to eight digits long. The first/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in
Program 11-01 as type 2.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
01~64
Extension
Item
Group Pilot
Description
Related Program
No.
Number
01
Dial
Use this program to assign
H
16-01 : Department (Extension)
department group pilot numbers.
Group Basic Data Setup
(Up to 8 digits)
The number set up by Program
H
16-02 : Department Group
11-02 (Extension Numbering)
Assignment for Extensions
cannot be used.
H
16-03 : Secondary Department
The extension number cannot be
Group
duplicated in Programs 11-02,
11-04, 11-06 and 11-08.
Default
H No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Department Calling
J
Department Step Calling
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 45

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number to assign the pilot number to the ACI
Groups set in Program 33-02. The pilot number can be up to four digits long. The
first/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 as type 2.
Input Data
ACI Group Number
01~16
Item
ACI Group Pilot
Related
Description
No.
Number
Program
01
Dial
The extension number cannot be duplicated
33-02
in Programs 11-02, 11-04, 11-06 and 11-07.
33-07
(Up to 8 digits)
Default
H No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 46
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-09 : Trunk Access Code
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code (normally 9).
The trunk access code can be set from 1 to 8 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in
Program 11-01. This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route
Selection. The Individual Trunk Access Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is
desired for an outgoing line.
Caution!
The digit 9 is defined in Program 11-01 as Dial Type 3 with the Number of Digits
Required set to 1. If you change the trunk access code in Program 11-09, you
must make the corresponding changes in Program 11-01.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
Related Program
No.
01
Trunk Access
Dial
9
Use this program
H
11-01 : System
Code
(up to 4
to assign the trunk
Numbering
digits)
access code
H
14-01 : Trunk Basic
(normally 9). This
Data Setup
is the code
extension users
H
14-05 : Trunk Group
dial to access
H
14-06 : Trunk Group
Automatic Route
Routing
Selection.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 47

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
Related Program
No.
02
2nd Trunk
Dial
No
Use this program
H
11-01 : System
Route Access
(up to 4
Setting
to define
Numbering
Code
digits)
additional trunk
H
14-01 : Trunk Basic
access codes.
Data Setup
When a user dials
the Alternate
H
14-05 : Trunk Group
Trunk Route
H
14-06 : Trunk Group
Access Code, the
Routing
system routes
their call to the
H
21-02 : Trunk Group
Routing for
Alternate Trunk
Extensions
Route.
H
21-15 : Alternate
Trunk Group
Routing for
Extensions
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Automatic Route Selection
J
Central Office Calls, Placing
J
Trunk Group Routing
2 - 48
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the
Service Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service
Codes in Programs 11-11 ~ 11-16. The following chart shows:
J
The number of each code (01~27).
J
The function of the Service Code.
J
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
J
The default entry. For example, dialing (item 26) allows users to force a trunk line to
disconnect.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Terminals
Default
No.
Program
01
Night Mode Switching
MLT, SLT
718
12-xx
20-07-01
02
--- Not Used ---
03
Setting the System Time
MLT
728
04
Storing Common Speed Dialing
MLT
753
Numbers
05
Storing Group Speed Dialing
MLT
754
Numbers
06
Setting the Automatic Transfer for
MLT
733
24-04-01
Each Trunk Line
07
Canceling the Automatic Transfer
MLT
734
24-04-01
for Each Trunk Line
08
Setting the Destination for
MLT
735
24-04-01
Automatic Trunk Transfer
09
--- Not Used ---
10
--- Not Used ---
11
--- Not Used ---
12
Night Mode Switching for Other
MLT
618
12-xx
Group
20-07-01
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 49

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Terminals
Default
No.
Program
13
--- Not Used ---
14
--- Not Used ---
15
--- Not Used ---
16
Leaving Message Waiting
MLT
626
11-11-09
17
Dial Block by Supervisor
MLT
601
90-19
18
Off-Premise Call Forward by Door
MLT
722
13-05
Box
19
--- Not Used ---
20
VRS - Record/Erase Message
MLT
616
20-07-13
21
VRS - General Message Playback
MLT
611
20-07-14
22
VRS - Record or Erase General
MLT
612
20-07-15
Message
23
SMDR - Extension Accumulated
MLT
621
20-07-18
Printout Code
24
SMDR - Group Accumulated
MLT
622
20-07-19
Printout Code
25
Account Code Accumulated
MLT
623
20-07-20
Printout Code
26
Forced Trunk Disconnect
MLT, SLT
*3
20-07-11
27
Trunk Port Disable for Outgoing
MLT
645
20-07-12
Calls
28
--- Not Used ---
29
--- Not Used ---
30
Register DECTPP
Not Set
31
Delete DECTPP
Not Set
32
Set Private Call Refuse
Not Set
33
Entry Caller ID Refuse
Not Set
34
Set Caller ID Refuse
Not Set
35
Dial In Mode Switching
Not Set
36
Change the Guidance Message
Not Set
Number on Voice Mail Auto
Attendant
2 - 50
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Refer to Input Data chart on the previous pages.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 51

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to
customize the Service Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can
customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, and 11-12 ~ 11-16.
The following chart shows:
J
The number of each code (01~58).
J
The function of the Service Code.
J
What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
J
The default entry. For example, dialing 725 (item 18) allows users to turn on or turn
off Background Music.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Terminals
Default
No.
Program
01
Call Forward - All
MLT, SLT
741
02
Call Forward - Busy
MLT, SLT
742
03
Call Forward - No Answer
MLT, SLT
743
04
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer
MLT, SLT
744
05
Call Forward - Both Ring
MLT, SLT
745
06
--- Not Used ---
07
Call Forwarding - Follow-Me
MLT, SLT
746
08
Do Not Disturb
MLT, SLT
747
09
Answer Message Waiting
MLT, SLT
*0
11-10-16
10
Cancel All Messages Waiting
MLT, SLT
773
11
Cancel Message Waiting
MLT, SLT
771
12
Alarm Clock
MLT, SLT
727
20-01-06
13
Display Language Selection for Keyset
MLT
678
15-02
2 - 52
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Terminals
Default
No.
Program
14
Text Message Setting
MLT
15
Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls
MLT
721
20-09-05
20-02-12
16
Force Ringing of Incoming Intercom Calls
MLT
723
20-09-05
20-02-12
17
Programmable Function Key Programming
MLT
751
15-07
(Dialing 851 Service Code)
11-11-38
18
BGM On/Off
MLT
725
19
Key Touch Tone On/Off
MLT
724
20
Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones
MLT
720
15-02
21
Check Incoming Ring Tones
MLT
711
22
Extension Name Programming
MLT
700
15-01
23
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL
MLT
679
24
Change Station Class of Service
MLT
677
20-13-28
Allows an extension user to change the COS of
another extension. Must be allowed in Program 20-
13-28.
25
Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension
MLT, SLT
602
20-11-17
Group
24-05
26
Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each
MLT, SLT
603
Extension Group
27
Destination of Automatic Transfer Each
MLT
604
20-11-17
Extension Group
24-05
28
Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group
MLT, SLT
605
20-11-17
24-05
24-02-08
29
Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each
MLT, SLT
606
20-11-17
Extension Group
30
DND Setup for Each Extension Group
MLT, SLT
607
31
DND Cancellation for Each Extension Group
MLT, SLT
608
32
--- Not Used ---
33
Dial Block
MLT, SLT
600
34
Temporary Toll Restriction Override
MLT, SLT
775
21-07
35
Pilot Group Withdrawing
MLT, SLT
650
36
Toll Restriction Override
MLT, SLT
663
21-14
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 53

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Terminals
Default
No.
Program
37
Ring Volume Set
MLT
729
38
Programmable Function Key Programming
MLT
752
15-07
(Dialing 852 Service Code)
11-11-17
39
One-Touch Dial Number Entry
MLT
755
40
--- Not Used ---
41
Tandem Ringing
MLT, SLT
15-07
30-03
42
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless Transferring When
Electra
689
Out of Range
Elite IPK II
Customize the service code to be used when
Wireless
setting a Electra Elite IPK II Wireless telephone to
transfer calls when out of range.
43
Headset Mode Switching
MLT, SLT
688
44
Auto Attendant
MLT
45
Set/Cancel Call Forward All (Split)
MLT, SLT
46
Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy (Split)
MLT, SLT
47
Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer (Split)
MLT, SLT
48
Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer (Split)
MLT, SLT
49
Set/Cancel Call Forward Both Ring (Split)
MLT, SLT
50
--- Not Used ---
51
--- Not Used ---
52
Set/Cancel Call Forward All Destination (No
MLT, SLT
790
Split)
53
Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy Destination (No
MLT, SLT
791
Split)
54
Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer Destination
MLT, SLT
792
(No Split)
55
Call Forward Busy No Answer Destination (No
MLT, SLT
793
Split)
56
--- Not Used ---
57
Set Do Not Call Table
No
Setting
58
Call Forward with Personal Greeting
MLT, SLT
713
2 - 54
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Refer to the Input Data chart above.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 55

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the
Service Codes which are used for service access. You can customize additional Service
Codes in Programs 11-10, 11-11, and 11-13 through 11-16.
The following chart shows:
J
The number of each code (01~59).
J
The function of the Service Code.
J
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
J
The default entry. For example, dialing 705 (code 05) will cancel a previously set
Camp-On.
J
Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.
If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the "New" column.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Terminals
Default
New
No.
Program
01
Bypass Call
MLT, SLT
707
11-16-09
Activating Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Override. This code is only
available if you disable the voice mail
Single Digit dialing code in Program
11-16-09.
02
Conference
MLT, SLT
#1
03
Override (Off-Hook Signaling)
MLT, SLT
709
04
Set Camp-On
MLT, SLT
750
05
Cancel Camp-On
MLT, SLT
770
06
Switching of Voice Call and Signal
MLT, SLT
712
Call
07
Step Call
MLT, SLT
708
08
Barge-In
MLT, SLT
710
2 - 56
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data (Continued)
Item
Related
Item
Terminals
Default
New
No.
Program
09
Change to STG (Department Group)
MLT, SLT
-
16-02
All Ring
10
Common/Extension Speed Dialing
MLT, SLT
#2
11
Group Speed Dialing
MLT, SLT
#4
12
Last Number Dial
MLT, SLT
#5
13
Saved Number Dial
MLT, SLT
715
14
Trunk Group Access
MLT, SLT
704
15
Specified Trunk Access
MLT, SLT
#9
16
Trunk Access Via Networking
MLT
-
17
Clear Last Number Dialing Data
MLT, SLT
776
18
Clear Saved Number Dialing Data
MLT, SLT
785
19
Internal Group Paging
MLT, SLT
701
31-01-01
20
External Paging
MLT, SLT
703
21
Meet-Me Answer to Specified Internal
MLT, SLT
764
Paging Group
22
Meet-Me Answer to External Paging
MLT, SLT
765
23
Meet-Me Answer in Same Paging
MLT, SLT
763
Group
24
Combined Paging
MLT, SLT
*1
31-07
25
Direct Call Pickup - Own Group
MLT, SLT
756
26
Call Pickup for Specified Group
MLT, SLT
768
27
Call Pickup
MLT, SLT
* #
28
Call Pickup for Another Group
MLT, SLT
769
29
Direct Extension Call Pickup
MLT, SLT
* *
30
Specified Trunk Answer
MLT, SLT
672
31
Park Hold
MLT, SLT
#6
24-03
32
Answer for Park Hold
MLT, SLT
*6
24-03
33
Group Hold
MLT, SLT
732
34
Answer for Group Hold
MLT, SLT
762
35
Station Park Hold
MLT, SLT
757
36
Door Box Access
MLT, SLT
702
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 57

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Input Data (Continued)
Item
Related
Item
Terminals
Default
New
No.
Program
37
Common Canceling Service Code
MLT, SLT
620
38
General Purpose Indication
MLT
783
39
--- Not Used ---
40
Station Speed Dialing
MLT, SLT
#7
41
Voice Over
MLT
690
11-16-08
42
Flash on Trunk lines
SLT
#3
43
Answer No-Ring Line (Universal
SLT
#0
14-05
Answer)
14-06
44
Callback Test for SLT
SLT
799
45
Enabled On Hook When Holding (SLT)
SLT
749
15-03-07
46
Answer On Hook When Holding (SLT)
SLT
759
15-03-08
47
Call Waiting Answer / Split Answer
MLT,SLT
794
11-12-03
Splitting (switching) between calls
48
Account Code
SLT
# #
49
--- Not Used ---
50
General Purpose Relay
MLT
780
51
VM Access (In-Mail and VMS)
MLT, SLT
*8
52
Live Monitoring (In-Mail)
MLT

53
Live Recording at SLT
SLT
654
54
VRS Routing for ANI/DNIS
782
Use when setting up ANI/DNIS Routing
to the VRS Automated Attendant. Using
the Transfer feature, this also allows a
call to be transferred to the VRS.
55
--- Not Used ---
56
E911 Alarm Shut Off
MLT, SLT
786
-
20-08-16
21-01-13
Enter the Service Code that an extension
user can dial to shut off the E911 Alarm
Ring.
57
Tandem Trunking
MLT, SLT
#8
58
Transfer Into Conference
MLT, SLT
624
20-13-10
20-13-15
Assign the Service Code users dial to
20-13-16
Transfer a call into a Conference call.
59
Trunk Drop Operation for SLT
SLT
2 - 58
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Refer to the Input Data chart on the previous pages.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 59

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) to customize the Service Codes
which are used with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature. You can customize
additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 through 11-12 and 11-14 ~ 11-16. The
following chart shows:
J
The number of each code (01~13).
J
The function of the Service Code.
J
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
J
The default entry.
If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the "New" column.
Input Data
Item
Terminals
Item
Default
New
No.
01
ACD Log In / Log Out (for KTS)
MLT, SLT
, 5
02
ACD Log Out (for SLT)
SLT
655
03
Set ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT)
SLT
656
04
Cancel ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT)
SLT
657
05
Set ACD Off Duty (for SLT)
SLT
658
06
Cancel ACD Off Duty (for SLT)
SLT
659
07
--- Not Used ---
08
Agent ID Code Login
MLT
No Setting
Allows an AIC Agent to log into a group.
09
Agent ID Code Logout
MLT
No Setting
Allows an AIC Agent to log out of a group.
10
ACD Agent Login by Supervisor
MLT
667
Allows an ACD Supervisor to log into a
group.
2 - 60
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Item
Terminals
Item
Default
New
No.
11
ACD Agent Logout by Supervisor
MLT
668
Allows an ACD Supervisor to log out of a
group.
12
Change Agent ACD Group by
MLT
669
Supervisor
When using service code 169 to change
an agent's ACD group, the supervisor
must enter a 2-digit number for the group.
For example, to change to ACD group 4,
the entry would be `169 04'.
13
ACD Agent Changing Own ACD
MLT
670
Group
Using this service code, an ACD Agent
can reassign themselves to another ACD
Group.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 61

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service
Codes which are used with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional
Service Codes in Programs 11-10 through 11-13, 11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes
can only be used at telephones registered as hotel terminals in Program 42-02.
The following chart shows:
J
The number of each code (01~18).
J
The function of the Service Code.
J
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
J
The default entry.
If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the "New" column.
Input Data
Item
Item
Terminals
Default
No.
01
Set DND for Own Extension
MLT, SLT
627
02
Cancel DND for Own Extension
MLT, SLT
628
03
Set DND for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
629
04
Cancel DND for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
630
05
Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension
MLT, SLT
631
06
Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension
MLT, SLT
632
07
Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
633
08
Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
634
09
Set Room to Room Call Restriction
MLT, SLT
635
10
Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel)
MLT, SLT
636
11
Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
637
12
Check-In
MLT, SLT
638
2 - 62
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Item
Item
Terminals
Default
No.
13
Check-Out
MLT, SLT
639
14
--- Not Used ---
15
Room Status Change for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
641
16
Room Status Output
MLT, SLT
642
17
Hotel Room Monitor
MLT, SLT
675
18
---Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Hotel/Motel
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 63

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to
customize the special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in the
Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs
11-10 ~ 11-14 and 11-16.
The following chart shows:
J
The number of each code (01~11)
J
The function of the Service Code.
J
What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
J
The default entry.
J
Programs that may be affected when changing the code.
If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the "New" column.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Terminals
Default
New
No.
Program
01
Remote Maintenance
730
02
ACD Access in Dial-In Conversion
760
22-04
Table
22-11
03
Backup Data Save
MLT
# * # 9
This option will save the user's soft key
settings (extension's programmed Call
Forwards, DND, etc.). It is
recommended to use this feature
before upgrading the system software.
04
--- Not Used ---
05
System Programming Mode,
MLT
# * # *
11-01
Log-On
06
Wake on LAN to APSU Unit
MLT
No
10-22
Setting
07
--- Not Used ---
2 - 64
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Terminals
Default
New
No.
Program
08
Network Message Lamp Control
1766
09
Transfer to Incoming Ring Group
No
Setting
10
--- Not Used ---
11
Ethernet Port Reset
MLT, SLT
12
Extension Data Swap
MLT, SLT
13
--- Not Used ---
14
Modem Access
MLT, SLT
740
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Hotel/Motel
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 65

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit
Service Codes used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize
additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 through 11-15.
The following chart shows:
J
The number of each code (01~11).
J
The function of the Service Code.
J
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
J
The default entry. For example, dialing 1 (code 03) when calling an extension will
switch the call from either a voice or signal call (depending on how it is currently
defined).
J
Programs that may be affected by changing these codes.
If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the "New" column.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Default
New
No.
Program
01
Step Call
2
11-12-07
02
Barge In
No Setting
11-12-08
03
Switching of Voice/Signal Call
1
11-12-06
04
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
,
11-12-03
05
Camp-On
#
11-12-04
06
DND/Call Forward Override Bypass
No Setting
11-12-01
07
Message Waiting
0
11-12-09
08
Voice Over
6
11-12-41
09
Access to Voice Mail
7
11-12-51
10
(Department) STG All Ring Mode
No Setting
11-12-09
16-01-05
11
Station Park Hold
No Setting
11-12-35
2 - 66
Program 11 : System Numbering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Refer to the Input Data chart on previous pages.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 67

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number to assign the ACD Master Number for
each ACD Group. This is the number users dial to transfer calls to the ACD Group.
Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 500) for the master
number. If you want to use an extension number which, by default, has a port number
assigned (for example: in the 101~199, 3101~3257), first remove the default
assignment. For example, to use extension number 125 as an ACD Master Number,
first give extension port 025 a different extension assignment.
Input Data
ACD Group Number
01~64
Item
ACD Group Pilot Number
No.
01
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
Default
H No ACD Group Pilot Numbers assigned to any ACD Group (1~64).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
J
Multiple Directory Numbers/Call Coverage Keys
2 - 68
Program 11 : System Numbering

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode
options. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range
and default setting.
Program
Input Data
Item
Input
Related
Item
Default
Description
No.
Data
Program
12
01
Manual Night
0 = Off
1
Allows/prevents users
11-10-01
Mode Switching
1 = On
from activating Night
Service by dialing a
service code.
02
Automatic Night
0 = Off
0
According to a preset
12-02
Mode Switching
1 = On
schedule, enable or
12-03
disable Automatic Night
12-04
Service for the system.
03
--- Not Used ---

Even if the operation mode is changed manually, the operation mode changes according to the
schedule set up.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Night Service
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 69

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-02 : Automatic Night Service
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern
of the Automatic Mode Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns
are used in Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01~32
Time Pattern Number
01~10
Set Time Number
01~20
Item
Description
Input Data
01
Start Time
0000~2359
02
End Time
0000~2359
03
Operation Mode
1~8
Example:
Time Pattern 1
0:00
9:00
12:00
13:00
17:00
18:00
22:00
0:00
Mode 3
Mode 1
Mode 4
Mode 1
Mode 4
Mode 2
Mode 3
(midnight)
(day)
(rest)
(day)
(rest)
(night)
(midnight)
To make the above schedule, it is necessary to set the data as follows:
Time setting 01:
00:00 to 09:00
Mode 3 (midnight)
Time setting 02:
09:00 to 12:00
Mode 1 (day)
Time setting 03:
12:00 to 13:00
Mode 4 (rest)
Time setting 04:
13:00 to 17:00
Mode 1 (day)
Time setting 05:
17:00 to 18:00
Mode 4 (rest)
Time setting 06:
18:00 to 22:00
Mode 2 (night)
Time setting 07:
22:00 to 00:00
Mode 3 (midnight)
2 - 70
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Time Pattern 2
0:00
0:00
Mode 2
(night)
Time setting 01:
00:00 to 00:00
Mode 2 (night)
Default
All groups, all patterns : 00:00 to 00:00 = Mode 1
Time Pattern 1
Set Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
0000
0800
2
02
0800
1700
1
03
1700
0000
2
04
0000
0000
1
:
:
:
:
20
0000
0000
1
Time Pattern 2
Set Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
0000
0000
2
02
0000
0000
1
:
:
:
:
20
0000
0000
1
Time Pattern 3
Set Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
0000
0000
1
:
:
:
:
20
0000
0000
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Night Service
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 71

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule
of night-switch settings.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01~32
Time Schedule
Item No.
Day of the Week
Pattern Number
01
01 = Sunday
0~10
02 = Monday
03 = Tuesday
04 = Wednesday
05 = Thursday
06 = Friday
07 = Saturday
2 - 72
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default
Time Schedule
Day of the Week
Pattern Number
01 = Sunday
2
02 = Monday
1
03 = Tuesday
1
04 = Wednesday
1
05 = Thursday
1
06 = Friday
1
07 = Saturday
2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Night Service
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 73

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule
of holiday night-switch settings. This schedule is used for the setting of special days
which the company is expected to be closed, such as a national holiday.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01~32
Item
Days and Months
Time Pattern Number
No.
01
0101~1231
0~10
(ex: 0101 = Jan. 1; 1231 = Dec. 31)
(0 = No Setting)
Default
H No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Night Service
2 - 74
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign
Day/Night Mode Group for each extension.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum: 8 Digits
Item
Night Mode Service
Default
No.
Group Number
01
01~32
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Night Service
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 75

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/
Night Mode Group for each trunk port.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Night Mode Service
Default
No.
Group Number
01
01~32
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Night Service
2 - 76
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message
which is displayed on an LCD of Multiline telephone in each Mode.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01~32
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Item
Text Message
No.
01
Maximum 12 Characters
(alphabetic or numeric)
Default
H Mode 1 = No setting
H Mode 2 = <Night>
H Mode 3 = <Midnight>
H Mode 4 = <Rest>
H Mode 5 = <Day2>
H Mode 6 = <Night2>
H Mode 7 = <Midnight2>
H Mode 8 = <Rest2>
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Night Service
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 77

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-08 : Night Mode Service Range
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range to define the changing range of
toggle key for each Day/Night Mode.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01~32
Item No.
Range
01
0 ~ 9
(default = 2)
Example:
When Program 12-08 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed (SC 751, 09 +0), the
following modes are switched:
J
Press once = Night
J
Press twice = Mid-night
J
Press third = Day
J
Default = 2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Night Service
2 - 78
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

Program 13 : Speed Dialing
13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup to define the Speed Dialing
functions.

Program
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
13
01
Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing
0
=
Trunk
0
13-05
Call Mode
Outgoing
Mode
1
=
Intercom
Outgoing
Mode
02
--- Not Used ---
03
Number of Common Speed
0~2000
1000
13-04
Dialing Bins
0
=
No Common
Speed Dialing
100 bins per 1 unit
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 79

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 13 : Speed Dialing
13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to
be used by each Speed Dialing group. (Refer to 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group
Assignment for Extensions).
Input Data
Item
Speed Dialing
Start Address of
End Address of
No.
Group Number
Speed Dialing Bin
Speed Dialing Bin
01
01~64
0~1990
0, 9~1999
Default
H No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station
2 - 80
Program 13 : Speed Dialing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 13 : Speed Dialing
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign
Speed Dialing Group for each extension. There are 64 Speed Dialing groups that are
available.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Item No.
Group Number
Default Value
01
01~64
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 81

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 13 : Speed Dialing
13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name to store Speed Dialing data into
the Speed Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned to
the Speed Dialing numbers.
Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number
0~1999
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Speed Dialing Data
1~9, 0, ,, #,
No
Pause (Press line key 1),
Setting
Recall/Flash (Press line key
2),
@ = Additional Digit for
ISDN Functionality (Press
line key 3)
(max. 24 digits)
02
Name
Maximum 12 Characters
No
(Use dial pad to enter name)
Setting
03
Transfer Mode
0
= No t Used
0
1
= Internal Dial
2
= Incoming Ring Group
(IRG)
04
Transfer Destination Number
If Transfer mode is (Refer to
No
13-04-03
13-03-03):
Setting
1: Internal Dial Mode
1~9, 0, ,, #, P,R,@
(Maximum 24 Characters)
2: Incoming Ring Group
0 ~ 100 (IRG Number)
P=Pause
R=Recall
@= Additional Digits when
using ISDN functionality
2 - 82
Program 13 : Speed Dialing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
05
Incoming Ring Pattern
Incoming Ring Pattern
0
13-04-03
0 = Normal Pattern
1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern (1~4)
5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern (1~5)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 83

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 13 : Speed Dialing
13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-05 : Speed Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be
seized for each Speed Dialing number.
If this program has an entry of `0' (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk
access group routing of the caller's extension (refer to Program 14-06). This setting is
only available in External Speed Dialing Mode (Program 13-01-01).
Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number
0~1999
Item No.
Trunk Group Number
01
0~100
Default
H No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station
2 - 84
Program 13 : Speed Dialing

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for
each trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its
range and default setting.
Program
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
14
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Trunk Name
Up to 12
Line 001
Characters
Line 002
Set the names for
Line 003
trunks. The trunk
:
name displays at the
Line 200
display of a multiline
terminal for incoming
and outgoing calls.
02
Transmit Level
1~63
32 (0dB)
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB
Use this option to
in 0.5dB intervals)
select the CODEC
gain for the trunk. The
option sets the
amount of gain (signal
amplification) for the
trunk you are
programming.
03
Receive Level
1~63
32 (0dB)
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB
Use this option to
in 0.5dB intervals)
select the CODEC
gain for the trunk. The
option sets the
amount of gain (signal
amplification) for the
trunk you are
programming.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 85

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
04
Transmit Gain Level
1~63
22 (-5dB)
for Conference and
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB
Transfer Calls
in 0.5dB intervals)
Use this option to
select the CODEC
gain type used by the
trunk when it is part of
an Unsupervised
Conference.
05
Receive Gain Level
1~63
22 (-5dB)
for Conference and
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB
Transfer Calls
in 0.5dB intervals)
Use this option to
select the CODEC
gain type used by the
trunk when it is part of
an Unsupervised
Conference.
06
SMDR Print Out
0
=
N o Pri nt Out
0
35-01
1
=
Prints Out
Use this option to
35-02
have the system
include/exclude the
trunk you are
programming from the
SMDR printout. See
Program 35-01 and
35-02 for SMDR
printout options.
07
Outgoing Calls
0
=
Deny (No)
1
1
=
Allow (Yes)
Use this option to
allow/prevent
outgoing calls on the
trunk you are
programming.
08
Toll Restriction
0
=
Restriction
1
21-04
Disabled
Use this option to
21-05
(No)
enable/disabled Toll
1
=
Restriction
21-06
Restriction for the
Enabled
trunk. If enabled, the
(Yes)
trunk follows Toll
Restriction
programming (ex:
Programs 21-05,
21-06). If disabled,
the trunk is a toll free
line.
2 - 86
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
09
Private Line
0
=
Disable
0
Private Line
(Normal)
1
=
Enable
Private Line
(Private
Line)
10
DTMF Tones for
0
=
Disable
0
Outgoing Calls
(No)
Use this option to
1
=
Enable
enable (1) or disable
(Yes)
(0) DTMF tones for
outgoing trunk calls.
11
Account Code
0
=
Disable
1
Required
(No)
1
=
Enable
(Yes)
12
-- Not Used --
13
Trunk-to-Trunk
0
=
Disable
Transfer
(No)
Use this option to
1
=
Enable
enable (1) or disable
(Yes)
(0) loop supervision
for the trunk. This
option is required for
Call Forwarding
Off-Premise and
Tandem Trunking
only.
14
Long Conversation
0
=
Disable
0
20-21-03
Cutoff
(No)
20-21-04
Use this option to
1
=
Enable
enable or disable the
(Yes)
Long Conversation
Cutoff feature for
each trunk.
15
Long Conversation
0
=
Disable
0
20-21-01
Alarm Before Cutoff
(No)
20-21-02
Use this option to
1
=
Enable
enable or disable the
(Yes)
Long Conversation
Alarm for each trunk.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 87

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
16
Forced Release of
0
=
Disable
0
24-01-01
Held Call
(No)
24-01-05
Use this option to
1
=
Enable
enable/disable forced
(Yes)
release for calls on
Hold. If enabled, the
system disconnects a
call if it is on Hold
longer than a
programmed interval
(Program 24-01-05).
If disabled, forced
disconnection does
not occur. Program
24-01-01 also affects
this option.
17
Trunk to Trunk
0
=
Disable
0
Warning Tone for
(No)
Long Conversation
1
=
Enable
Alarm
(Yes)
Use this option to
enable or disable the
Warning Tone for
Long Conversation
feature for DISA
callers.
18
Warning Beep Tone
0
=
Disable
0
Signaling
(No)
1
=
Enable
(Yes)
19
Privacy Mode
0
=
Disable
0
Toggle Option
(No)
Use this option to
1
=
Enable
enable or disable a
(Yes)
trunk's ability to be
switched from private
to non-private mode
by pressing the line
key or Privacy
Release function key.
2 - 88
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
20
Block Outgoing
0
=
Disable
0
14-01-21
Caller ID
(No)
Allow (1) or prevent
1
=
Enable
(0) the system from
(Yes)
automatically blocking
outgoing Caller ID
information when a
user places a call. If
allowed (i.e. block,
enabled), the system
automatically inserts
the Caller ID block
code (defined in
14-01-21) before the
user dialed digits.
21
Caller ID Block Code
Dial (up to 8
,67
14-01-20
Enter the code, up to
digits)
8 digits, that should
be used as the Caller
ID Block Code. This
code is automatically
inserted before dialed
digits if Program
14-01-20 is set to `1'.
22
Caller ID to Voice
0
=
Disable
0
Mail
(No)
Enable or disable the
1
=
Enable
system's ability to
(Yes)
send the Caller ID
digits (Remote
Log-On Protocol) to
voice mail.
23
LCR
0 = LCR Off
0
(Service Off)
-- Not Used in U.S. --
1 = LCR On
(Service On)
2 = Cost Center
Only
24
Trunk-to-Trunk
0
=
Disable
0
Outgoing Caller ID
(No)
through Mode
1
=
Enable
(Yes)
25
Continued/
0
=
Disable
0
Discontinued Trunk-
(No)
to-Trunk
1
=
Enable
Conversation
(Yes)
26
Automatic Trunk-to-
0 = Normal
0
Trunk Transfer Mode
Transfer (Normal)
1 = Step Transfer
(Step)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 89

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
27
Caller ID Refuse
0
=
Disable
0
Setup
(No)
1
=
Enable
(Yes)
28
Effectivity of
0 = No Effect (No)
1
"Conversation
1 = Available (Yes)
Recording
Destination for
Extension"
Default
Trunk Port
Name
Number
001
LINE 001
002
LINE 002
:
:
200
LINE 200
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Refer to features in the Input Data table.
2 - 90
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each
analog trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range
and default setting.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Signaling Type (DP/DTMF)
0
=
Dial Pulse (10 PPS)
2
1
=
Dial Pulse (20 PPS)
This option sets the signaling type for
2
=
DTMF
the trunk.
02
Ring Detect Type
0
=
Normal/delayed
1
1
=
Immediate Ringing
This option sets Extended Ring Detect
or Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk.
For T1 loop/ground start trunks, this
option must be set to `1' in order for the
trunks to ring and lamp correctly.
03
Flash Type
0
=
Open Loop Flash
0
1
=
Ground
This option to select the flash type
(open loop flash or ground). Always set
this option for open loop flash.
04
Hooking Type
0
=
Timed Flash
0
81-10-07
(Hooking)
81-10-08
This option lets you use Flash for
1
=
Disconnect (Cut)
Timed Flash (Program 81-01-14) or
Disconnect (Program 81-01-15). (A
user implements Flash by pressing the
FLASH key while on a trunk call.)
05
Dial Tone Detection for Manual
0
=
Dial Tone Detection
21-01-04
Accessed Trunks
Not Used
Use this option enable/disable dial tone
1
= Dial Tone Detection
detection for directly accessed trunks.
Used
If disabled, the system outdials on the
trunks without monitoring for dial tone.
06
Pause at 1st Digit after Line Seize in
0
=
No Pause (No)
1
21-01-06
Manual Dial Mode
1
=
Pause (Yes)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 91

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
07
DP to DTMF Conversion Options
0 = Automatic
2
21-01-03
1 = Automatic and Manual
Determine how a user can convert a
2 = Manual
Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call. For
each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF
conversion required. There are three
conversion options: Automatic (0),
Automatic and Manual (1), or Manual
(2).
Automatic:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs
automatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit.
Automatic and Manual:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs
automatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit. In addition, the
user can dial # to switch a DP trunk to
DTMF dialing.
Manual:
User can dial # to switch a DP trunk to
DTMF dialing
08
Answering Condition
0 = Polarity Reversing
1
21-01-03
(Polarity)
1 = Polarity Reversing on
Timer (Int Digit)
09
Busy Tone Detection
0
=
Disable (No)
0
1
=
Enable (Yes)
10
Caller ID
0
=
No
0
1
=
Yes
Enable or disable a trunk to receive
Caller ID information.
11
Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
0
=
Disable (No)
0
1
=
Enable (Yes)
Use this option to enable/disable the
system's ability to skip over a trunk if
dial tone is not detected. This option
pertains to calls placed using Speed
Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or
Save Number dialed. It does not
pertain to line key or Direct Trunk
Access calls.
12
Detect Network Disconnect Signal
0
=
Disable (No)
1
1
=
Enable (Yes)
13
Trunk-to-Trunk Limitation
0
=
Disable (No)
0
1
=
Enable (Yes)
2 - 92
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
14
Loop Start/Ground Start
0
=
Loop Start (Loop)
0
1
=
Ground Start
(Ground)
15
--- Not Used ---
16
Caller ID Type
0 = FSK
0
1 = DTMF
17
Sync. Ringing
0 = Disable
1
1 = Enable
Use this to specify whether or not CO/
PBX calls follow Synchronous Ringing.

Synchronous Ringing does not
apply to incoming DID calls,
off-hook ringing calls, or CO/
PBX ring transfer calls.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 93

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a
PBX. There is one item for each of the modes.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
1~200
Item
Day/Night
Related
Type of Connection
Default
No.
Mode
Program
01
1~8
0 = Stand Alone (Trunk)
0
22-02
1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 94
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-05 : Trunk Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Groups to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also
assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk
group, they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Trunk Group
Order Number
No.
Number
01
0~100
1~200
Default
Trunk Port
Group
Priority
1
1
1
:
:
:
200
1
200
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Trunk Groups
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 95

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for
the trunk groups you assigned in Program 14-05. When users dial 9, the system
routes their calls in the order (priority) specified. For example, if a user dials 9 and all
calls in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group. Trunk
Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may limit this option. The system
contains 100 routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four priority orders for
trunk access. There are 100 Trunk Group Numbers that are available.
Example for setting:
With less than 4 trunk groups,
Route Number 1
: Order 1 Trunk Group 1

: Order 2 Trunk Group 2
For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches
for an idle line in trunk group 2.
With more than 4 trunk groups,
Route Number 1
: Order 1 Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 Trunk Group 2
: Order 3 Trunk Group 3
: Order 4 1002 (Jump To Route Number 2)
Route Number 2
: Order 1 Trunk Group 4
: Order 2 Trunk Group 5
For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk group 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the system
searches for an idle line in trunk group 4 and 5.
2 - 96
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1

Input Data
Route Table Number
001~100
Item
Priority Order
Related
Input Data
No.
Number
Program
01
1~4
0 = Not Specify
14-01-07
1-8 or 001~100 : (Trunk Group Number)
14-05
1001~1100 : (1000 + Route Table
15-01-02
Number)
21-02
Default
H Route 1, Order Number 1 = 1 (Trunk Group 1).
H Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not Specified).
H All Other Routes (2~100) and Order Numbers (1-4) = 0 (Not Specified).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 97

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps.
This sets an extension's access options for trunks. For example, an extension can
only place outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. There are 200
Access Maps with all 200 trunk ports programmed in Map 1 with full access.
An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 15-06
to assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access
options for each Access Map.
Input Data
Access Map Number
001~200
Item
Trunk Port
Input Data
No.
Number
01
001~200
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access only
2 = Incoming access only
3 = Access only when trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold
5 = Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold
6 = Incoming and Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access, outgoing access and access when trunk
on Hold
Default
H Access Map 1 = Trunk Ports 1~200 assigned with option `7' access (incoming
and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold).
H Access Maps 2~200 - Trunk Ports 1~200 assigned with option `0' access (no
access).
2 - 98
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Central Office Calls, Answering
J
Central Office Calls, Placing
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 99

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a Music on Hold
source for a trunk as either the ACI or COI port.

If ACI is selected as the source in Item 1, the port number for the source must be
selected in Item 2.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
MOH Type
0
=
Internal synthesized/external MOH
0
1
=
A customer-provided source connected to
Select a Music on Hold source
BGM port
for the trunk.
2
=
A customer-provided source connected to
ACI port
02
Source Port Number
If the MOH Type is "2", the source port number is
0
0 96.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Music on Hold
2 - 100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the
ACI Conversation Recording destination for each trunk.

If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12
will be followed.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
ACI Recording Destination Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
No Setting
Enter the ACI extension number to which the trunk
calls should be recorded.
02
ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls
0 = Off
0
Determine if incoming trunk calls should be
1 = On
automatically recorded to the ACI.
03
--- Not Used ---
04
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 101

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-13 : CCIS System Route ID
Level:
IN
Description
This program defines the CCIS route ID to the trunk group used for K-CCIS.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
001~100
Item
Trunk Group Number
Input Data
Default
No.
01
001~100
0
= Not Assigned
14-05-01
1 ~ 8 = CCIS Route IDs
50-02-01
50-02-02
CCIS Route IDs 5~ 8 are used for future
50-02-03
and should not be used.
50-02-04
50-02-05
50-02-06
Default Settings
H Not Assigned
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
2 - 102
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
This program defines the CIC (Circuit Identifier Code) to each voice channel (trunk
port) used for K-CCIS.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
001 ~ 200
Item
Trunk Group Number
Input Data
Default
No.
01
001~200
0
= Not Assigned
14-05-01
1 ~ 127 CIC Numbers
Default Settings
H Not Assigned
Conditions
H CIC Numbers must be assigned consecutively for K-CCIS to operate correctly.
H The D-Channel trunk port should not have a CIC assignment.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 103

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 104
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic
settings for each extension.
Program

The item numbers indicated below are different when using PCPro/WebPro.
Refer to the program within the PCPro/WebPro application to determine the
correct item number.
Input Data
15
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Extension Name
Up to 12 Characters
Define the extension/virtual
extension name.
02
Outgoing Trunk Line
0
= Off
0
14-06
Preference
1
= On
21-02
Use this option to set the
extension's outgoing Trunk
Line Preference. If enabled,
the extension user trunk dial
tone when they lift the handset.
The user hears trunk dial tone
only if allowed by Trunk Access
Map programming (Programs
14-07 and 15-06). Refer to the
Line Preference feature for
more details.
03
SMDR Printout
0
= Do not print on
1
Use this option to include or
SMDR report
exclude the extension in the
1
= Include on
SMDR report.
SMDR report
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 105

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
04
ISDN Caller ID
0 = Disable
1
10-03-05
1 = Enable
If both Program 15-01-04 and
10-03-05 are enabled, the
system includes Caller ID in
the Setup message as
"Presentation Allowed". If
these options are disabled, it
will be "Presentation
Restricted".
05
Restriction for Outgoing
0 = No
0
21-01-15
Disable on Incoming Line
1 = Yes
21-01-16
Enable or disable supervised
21-01-17
dial detection for an extension.
06
--- Not Used ---
07
Do-Not-Call
0 = Off
0
21-01-19
1 = On
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
None
2 - 106
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various Multiline
telephone options.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Display Language Selection
0
= Japanese
1
11-11-13
(To select options 8-10, press either 8 or
1
= English
Recall, then press line keys 1-3. Key 1
2
= German
is option 8, Key 2 is option 9, and Key 3
3
= French
is option 10.)
4
= Italian
5
= Spanish
6
= Dutch
7
= Portuguese
8
= Norwegian
9
= Danish
10 = Swedish
11 =
Turkish
12 =
Latin American
Spanish
02
Trunk Ring Tone
1
= High
2
22-03
Use this option to set the tone (pitch) of
2
= Medium
the incoming trunk ring for the extension
3
= Low
port you are programming.
4
= Ring Tone 1
5
= Ring Tone 2
6
= Ring Tone 3
7
= Ring Tone 4
8
= Ring Tone 5
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 107

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
03
Extension Ring Tone
1
= High
8
Use this option to set the tone (pitch) of
2
= Medium
the incoming extension call ring for the
3
= Low
extension port you are programming.
4
= Ring Tone 1
Also see program 15-08.
5
= Ring Tone 2
6
= Ring Tone 3
7
= Ring Tone 4
8
= Ring Tone 5
04
Redial (Speed Dial) Control
0
= Common and
0
Use this option to control the function of
Individual Speed
the extension's Redial key when used
Dialing
with Speed Dialing. The Redial key can
1
= Group Speed Dialing
access either the Common or Group
Speed Dialing numbers.
05
Transfer Key Operation Mode
0
= Transfer
0
Use this option to set the operating
1
= Call back
mode of the extension's CONF key. The
2
= Hook
keys can be for Call Transfer, Serial
Calling or Flash. When selecting the
Flash option (selection 2), refer also to
Program 81-01-14.
06
Hold Key Operating Mode
0
= Normal (Common)
0
Use this option to set the function of the
1
= Exclusive Hold
Multiline Hold key. The Hold key can
activate normal Hold or Exclusive Hold.
07
Automatic Hold for CO Lines
0
= Hold
1
1
= Disconnect (Cut)
08
Automatic Handsfree
0
= Pre-select
1
Use this option to set whether pressing
1
= One-Touch
a key access a One-Touch Key or if it
(Automatic
pre-selects the key.
Handsfree)
09
--- Not Used ---
10
Ringing Line Preference for Trunk
0
= Idle (Off)
1
Calls
1
= Ringing (On)
Use this option to select between Idle
and Ringing Line Preference for trunk
calls.
11
Callback Automatic Answer
0
= Off
1
Use this option to enable or disable
1
= On
automatic answer for Callback. If
enabled, extension automatically
answers Callback ring when user lifts
the handset. If disabled, use must press
line appearance key to answer
Callback.
2 - 108
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
12
Off-Hook Ringing
0
= Muted Off-Hook
5
Use this option to set the keyset's Off-
Ringing
Hook signaling. Off-hook signaling
1
= No Off-Hook Ringing
occurs when a keyset user receives a
2
= Not Used
second call while busy on a handset
3
= Beep in Speaker (SP)
call. To enable/disable Off-Hook
4
= Beep in Handset (HS)
Signaling for an extension's Class of
5
= SPHS Beep
Service, use Program 20-13-06.
13
Redial List Mode
0
= ICM/Trunk
1
Select whether the Redial List feature
(Extension/Trunk
should store internal and external
Mode)
numbers (0), or only external numbers
1
= Trunk Mode
(1).
14
--- Not Used ---
-
15
Storage of Caller-ID for answered call
0
= Disable (Off)
1
1
= Enable (On)
16
Handsfree Operation
0
= Disable (Off)
1
Enable or disable an extensions ability
1
= Enable (On)
to use the speakerphone on outside
calls. When disabled, users can hear
the conversation, but cannot respond
handsfree.
17
--- Not Used ---
-
18
Power-Saving Mode
0
= Normal mode
1
1
= Power-Saving Mode
(Eco-Mode)
19
CTA Data Communication Mode
0
= CT I Mode
0
15-02-20
Select `0' if the dip switch settings on
1
= Non
Procedural
Mode
the CTA Adapter are set to PC
(Non-SCS)
connection (1=on, 2~8=off) or select `1'
if the dip switches are set to printer
connection (1~2=on, 3~8=off).
20
Baud Rate for CTA Port
0
= 4800
2
15-02-19
Select the baud rate to be used by the
1
= 9600
CTA Adapter.
2
= 19200
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 109

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
21
Virtual Extension Access Mode
0
= DSS
2
(when idle Virtual Extension key
1
= Outgoing (OTG)
pressed)
2 = Ignore
Determine whether a Virtual Extension/
Call Arrival Key(CAR) should function
as a DSS key, a Virtual Extension, or a
CAR key. When DSS (0) is selected,
the key functions as a DSS key to the
extension and for incoming calls to that
extension. When Outgoing (1) is
selected, the key functions as a virtual
extension and can be used for incoming
and outgoing calls. When Ignore (2) is
selected, the key functions as a CAR
key and can receive incoming calls only.
22
Multiple Incoming From Intercom
0
= Disable
1
22-01-01
and Trunk
1
= Enable
If enabled, this affects how a Hotline key
lamps, based on the setting in Program
22-01-01. If 22-01-01 is set to 1 for trunk
priority, the Hotline key will lamp solid
when a trunk call rings in. If 22-01-01 is
set to 0 for intercom priority, the Hotline
key will not lamp for incoming trunk
calls, but will lamp solid for intercom
calls.
If 15-02-22 is disabled, Hotline keys will
lamp solid for any incoming calls
regardless of the setting in Program
22-01-01.
23
Speed Dial Preview Mode
0
= Preview
0
This option defines how a speed dial
1
= Outgoing Immediately
key functions when pressed. If set to
Preview (0), the speed dial number can
be previewed before dialing. If set to
Outgoing Immediate (1), the number is
dialed immediately.
24
Conference Key Mode
0
= Conference
0
This option allows an extension's CONF
1
= Transfer
key to be programmed for Conference
or for Transfer. When set for Transfer
(1), the user places a call on hold, dials
the extension to which it should be
transferred, the presses the CONF key.
The call is then transferred. When set
for Conference (0), with an active call,
the user presses the CONF key, places
a second call, then presses the CONF
key twice. All the calls are then
connected.
2 - 110
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
26
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
0
= Message Key
0
Setup, MSG Key Operation Mode
1
= Voice Mail Key
Determine whether an extension's MSG
key should function as a Message key
or Voice Mail key. If set as a Message
key, the user will be able to press the
key to call the voice mail only when they
have new messages.
27
Handset Volume
0
= Back to Default
1
Determine how an extensions handset
(Back)
volume will be set after it is adjusted
1
= Stay at previous level
during a call.
(Stay)
28
Message Waiting Lamp Color
0
= Green
1
Determine whether an extension's
1
= Red
Message Waiting Lamp lights Green (0)
or Red (1) when a message is received.
29
PB Back Tone Level
1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB)
32
This program allows adjustment of the
PB Back Tone Level when you are
calling an ISDN Line.
30
Toll Restriction Class
0
= Vir. Ext Vir. Ext
1
Select the Toll Restriction Class to be
(Virtual Extension's
used when placing a call from a virtual
Class)
extension.
1
= Real Ext (Real
Extension's Class)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 111

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-3 Program 15 : 02 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Incoming Signal
Type
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Modulation
Frequency Pattern
External Incoming Signal
High
1100
1400
16Hz
Frequency (Pattern 1)
Middle
660
760
16Hz
Low
520
660
16Hz
External Incoming Signal
High
1100
1400
8Hz
Frequency (Pattern 2)
Middle
660
760
8Hz
Low
520
660
8Hz
External Incoming Signal
High
1100
1100
Envelope
Frequency (Pattern 3)
Middle
660
660
Envelope
Low
520
520
Envelope
External Incoming Signal
High
1100
1100
No modulation
Frequency (Pattern 4)
Middle
660
660
No modulation
Low
520
520
No modulation
Internal Incoming Signal
High
1100
1400
8Hz
Frequency
Middle
660
760
8Hz
Low
520
660
8Hz
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Refer to the Input Data chart.
2 - 112
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various
single line telephone options.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No
Program
01
SLT Signaling Type
0
= DP
1
Use this option to tell the system the type of
1
= DTMF
dialing the connected telephone uses.
In order for the Electra Elite IPK II Wireless
telephones to function correctly, this must be set
to '0' (dial pulse). If this option is set for DTMF,
after an outside call is placed, the system will not
dial any additional digits.
This program change is automatically performed
when the Electra Elite IPK II Wireless telephone
is registered when using system software 1.13+.
When upgrading software from prior versions,
the previous default of '1' will be saved from the
prior database so this option must be changed
manually.
02
--- Not Used ---
03
Terminal Type
0
= Normal
0
Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port
1
= Special
to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after
the initial call setup. For Voice Mail, always enter
1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).
04
Flashing
0
= No
1
Enables/disables Flash for single line (500/2500
1
= Yes
type) telephones.
05
Trunk Polarity Reverse
0
= Off
0
Not Used in U.S. - Do Not Change Default Entry as
1
= On
DTMF issues may arise with voice mail.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 113

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No
Program
06
Extension Polarity Reverse
0
= Disable
0
-- Not Used in U.S. --
(Off)
Do Not Change Default Entry as DTMF issues
1
= Enable
may arise with voice mail.
(On)
07
Enabled On-Hook When Holding (SLT)
0
= No
1
11-12-45
1
= Yes
08
Answer On-Hook when Holding (SLT)
0
= Disable
1
11-12-46
(No)
1
= Yes
(Enable)
09
Caller ID Function - For External Module
0
= Disable
0
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Caller ID FSK signal
(Off)
for an external Caller ID module or a 3rd party
1
= Enable
vendor telephone with Caller ID display.
(On)
Important:
If voice mail is used, this setting must be
disabled or the system integration codes for
disconnect will be incorrect.
With some earlier software, if a 2500 set (no
Caller ID) is installed, this must be set to "0"
or else incoming callers will not have a talk
path.
10
Caller ID Name
0
= Disable
1
15-03-09
Determine if an extension user's telephone
1
= Enable
should display the Caller ID name.
11
Caller ID Type
0
= FSK
0
Determine whether the Caller ID type is FSK or
1
= DTMF
DTMF.
12
--- Not Used ---
13
--- Not Used ---
14
Forwarded Caller ID Display Mode
0
= Calling
0
Determine what the display shows when a
Extensio
multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside
n
call.
Number
(Calling)
1
= External
Caller ID
(Forward)
15
Disconnect without dial after hooking hold
0
= Normal
0
Determine whether or not to disconnect a held
1
= Disc.
call when on-hook without any dialing after
hooking-hold.
2 - 114
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Normal
Outgoing Call
Idle
Reverse
Normal
Incoming Call
Idle
Reverse
Normal
Call Pickup
Idle
Reverse
(1) = Off-Hook (2) = Calling/Ringing (3) = Answer (4) = Detect Hang Up (5) = On-Hook
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Single Line Telephone, Analog
J
Single Line Telephone, Digital
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 115

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic
settings for an IP telephone.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
Program
01
Terminal Type
3
= MEGACO
0
Viewing Only - No changes
permitted
02
IP Phone Fixed
MAC address
00-00-00-00-00-00
For any IP telephone, the
15-05-01
Port Assignment
00-00-00-00-00-00 to
MAC Address as indicated on
the telephone/adapter's label
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
to assign a specific extension
number.
06
IP Phone
1 = IP70
0
Terminal Type
2 = IP80
3 = Smart Phone
07
Using IP Address
0.0.0.0 ~
0.0.0.0
"Informational Only"
15-05-01
255.255.255.255
registered IP Phones
15
CODEC Type
1-Type 1
1
2-Type 2
3-Type 3
4-Type 4
5-Type 5
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 116
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access
map for each extension. An extension can only place outgoing calls on trunks to
which it has outgoing access. Use Program 14-07 to define the available access
maps.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Item
Trunk Access
Related
Default
No.
Map Number
Program
01
1~200
1
14-07
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Central Office Calls, Answering
J
Central Office Calls, Placing
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 117

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to assign functions to a
multiline terminal's line keys.
For certain functions, you can append data to the key's basic function. For example,
the function 26 appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group
1. You can also program Function Keys using Service Codes.
In order to clear any previously programmed key, press 000 to erase any displayed
code.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Line Key
Function Number
Additional Data
No.
Number
01
1~48
0~99
Refer to Function
(Normal Function Code) (Service Code 751 by
Number List.
default)
* 00-* 99
(Appearance Function Code) (Service Code 752 by
default)
2 - 118
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default
Programmable keys 1~8 are Trunk Line keys (key 1 = Trunk Line 1, key 2 = Trunk Line 2,
etc.). All other programmable keys are undefined.
Function Number List
[1] Normal Function Code (00 99) (Service Code 751)
Function Number List
[1] Normal Function Code (00 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
00
Not Defined
01
DSS / One-Touch
Extension number or any
Red On: Extension Busy
numbers (up to 24 digits)
Off: Extension Idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
02
Microphone Key (ON/OFF)
Red On: Mic Off
Off: Mic On
03
DND Key
Red On: DND
04
BGM (ON/OFF)
Red On: BGM On
Off: BGM Off
05
Headset
Red On: Headset in use
06
Transfer Key
None
07
Conference Key
Red On: Conference call setup
occurring
08
Incoming Call Log
Rapid Blink (Red): New call log
Red On: Call log
Off: No call log
09
Day/Night Mode Switch
Mode number (1~8)
Red On: Mode active
10
Call Forward - Immediate
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded
11
Call Forward - Busy
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded
12
Call Forward - No Answer
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded
13
Call Forward - Busy/No
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded
Answer
14
Call Forward Both Ring
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded
15
Follow Me
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded
16
--- Not Used ---
17
--- Not Used ---
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 119

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] Normal Function Code (00 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
18
Text Message Setup
Message Numbers (01~20)
Red On: Feature activated by Function
Key
19
External Group Paging
External Paging Number
Red On: Page Active
(1~8)
20
External All Call Paging
Red On: Page Active
21
Internal Group Paging
Internal Paging Number
Red On: Page Active
(01~64)
22
Internal All Call Paging
None
23
Meet-Me Answer to
None
Internal Paging
24
Call Pickup
None
25
Call Pickup for Another
None
Group
26
Call Pickup for Specified
Call Pickup Group Number
None
Group
27
Speed Dial Common/
Speed Dial Number
None
Private
(Common / Private)
28
Speed Dial - Group
Speed Dial number (Group)
None
29
Repeat Redial
Red On: Waiting to redial
30
Saved Number Redial
None
31
Memo Dial
None
32
Meet Me Conference
None
33
Override (Off-Hook
None
Signaling)
34
Break - In
None
35
Camp On
Red On: While camp-on activated
36
Step Call
None
37
DND / FWD Override Call
None
38
Message Waiting
None
39
Room Monitoring
Rapid Blink (Red): While being
monitored
Slow Blink (Red): While monitoring
2 - 120
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] Normal Function Code (00 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
40
Handset Transmission
Red On: Transmission cut-off
Cutoff
41
Buzzer
Extension Number
Red On: Transmission Side
Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side
42
Boss Secretary Call
Extension Number
Red On: Boss Secretary mode
43
Series Call
None
44
Common Hold
None
45
Exclusive
None
46
Department Group Log Out
Red On: Logged Out
47
Reverse Voice Over
Extension Number
Red On: extension busy
Off: extension idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
Green: Reverse Voice Over to
extension in progress
48
Voice Over
Slow Blink (Red): Voice Over - Active
49
Call Redirect
Extension Number or Voice
None
Mail Number
50
Account Code
Red On: While account code being
entered
51
General Purpose Relay
Relay No (0, 1~8)
Red On: Relay On
52
Automatic Answer with
Incoming Group Number
Red On: Under setting
Delay Message Setup
53
Automatic Answer with
Red On: Active
Delay Message Start
54
External Call Forward by
Red On: Active
Door Box
55
Extension Name Change
None
56
General Purpose LED
Blink (Red): Active
Operation
57
General Purpose LED
Blink (Red): Active
Indication
58
Automatic Transfer at
Extension Group Number
Blink (Red): Active
Department Group Call
(1~8 or 01~64)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 121

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] Normal Function Code (00 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
59
Delayed Transfer at
Extension Group Number
Blink (Red): Active
Department Group Call
(1~8 or 01~64)
60
DND at Department Group
Extension Group Number
Blink (Red): Active
Call
(1~8 or 01~64)
61
-- Not Used --
63
Outgoing Call Without
Red On: Active
Caller ID (ISDN)
64
--- Not Used ---
Red On: Active
65
--- Not Used ---
66
CTI
Red On: CTI active
67
Mail Box
Extension Number or
Rapid Blink (Green): New message
Department Group Number
received
Red On: Listening to messages
68
Voice Mail Service
0 = Skip
2-In case of monitor mode
1 = Back Skip
Slow Blink (Red): Monitor Setting -
2 = Monitor
Automatic
Red On: Monitor Setting - Manual
69
Conversation Record - ACI
0 = ACI as Record Destination
Red On: Recording Call
1 = Not Used in U.S.
2 = Not Used in U.S.
3 = Not Used in U.S.
70
Automated Attendant for
Extension Number or
None
Extension
Department Group Number
71
Message Change for Voice
Extension Number or
None
Attendant
Department Group Number
72
Keypad Facility Key
73
Keypad HOLD Key
74
Keypad RETRIEVE Key
75
Keypad Conference Key
76
Toll Restriction in Credit --
Extension Number
77
Voice Mail (In-Skin)
Extension Number or Pilot
Red On: Access to Voice Mail
Number
Rapid Blink (Green): New Message
2 - 122
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] Normal Function Code (00 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
78
Conversation Recording -
Rapid Blink (Red): Recording
Voice Mail
79
Automated Attendant
Extension Number or Pilot
Red On: Set Up for All Calls
(In-Skin)
Number
Fast Blink (Red): Set Up for No
Answer Calls
Stutter Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy
Calls
Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No
Answer Calls
80
Tandem Ringing
1 = Set
Red On: Active
0 = Cancel
Extension Number to Tandem
Ring
81
Automatic Transfer to
Trunk Line No. (001~200)
Transfer Key
82
Dterm IP Call Log
83
Conversation Recording
0 = Pause
Function (VMSU)
1 = Re-recording
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page
84
Drop Key
85
Directory Dialing
86
Private Call Refuse
87
Caller ID Refuse
88
Dial-In Mode Switching
22-17
89
Do-Not-Call Setup
90
Do-Not-Call Data
Registration
91
Live Recording Key In-Mail
92
.
.
--- Not Used ---
99
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 123

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Function Number List
[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 - *99) (Service Code 752)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
,00
--- Not Used ---
,01
Trunk Key
Trunk Number (1~8 or
Red On: Trunk Busy by Another User
001~200)
Green On: Trunk Busy by Extension
,02
Trunk Group
Trunk Group Number
Red On: Trunk Busy by Another User
(1~8 or 001~100)
Green On: Trunk Busy by Extension
,03
Virtual Extension Key
Extension Number or
Red On: Trunk busy by another user
Department Group Number
Slow Blink (Red): Incoming Call
,04
Park Key
Park Number (01 64)
Slow Blink (Red): Call Placed in
Park by Another User
Fast Blink (Green): Extension
Placed Call in Park
,05
--- Not Used ---
,06
Trunk Access Via
Network System Number
Networking
(01~50)
,07
Station Park Hold None
,08
CAP Key
CAP Orbit No. (01~64)

If CAP Orbit No.000 is used,
the next available orbit is
automatically selected.
,09
--- Not Used ---
,10
ACD Log In / Log Out
Red On: Under log-on
Off: Under log-off
,11
--- Not Used ---
,12
ACD Emergency Call
Red On: Under monitor, Override,
Standby
Fast Blink (Red): Supervisor
Telephone Receiving Emergency Call
,13
ACD Off Duty Mode
Red On: Under Off Duty
Slow Blink (Red): Under Reservation
,14
ACD Start / End
Red On: ACD Operation End
,15
ACD Terminal Speech
Red On: Under Monitor
Monitor
,16
ACD Waiting
Red On: Standby
2 - 124
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Function Number List (Continued)
[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 - *99) (Service Code 752)
,17
ACD Work Wrap Up Time
Red On: Under Work Time
Slow Blink (Red): Under Reservation
,18
ACD Overflow Control
ACD Group Number
Red On: Enable
Slow Blink (Red): Disable
,19
ACD Queue Status Display
Check
,20
.
.
--- Not Used ---
.
,99
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 125

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
LED Indication Reference:
ON = LED pattern 7 (On).
OFF = LED pattern 0 (Off).
Rapid Blink = LED pattern 3 (RW).
Slow Blink (General Function Level) = LED pattern 5 (IL).
Slow Blink (Appearance Function Level) = LED pattern 1 (FL).
Fast Blink = LED pattern 3 (RW).
Stutter Blink = LED pattern 4 (IR).
2 - 126
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
H When a key is programmed using service code 752, that key cannot be
programmed with a function using the 751 code until the key is undefined (000).
For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing 752 + ,04 must be
undefined by dialing 752 + 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key
by dialing 751 + 48.
H When assigning a CAP key, ,08, an orbit number must be used. If orbit 000 is
used, it will automatically assign the next available orbit.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Refer to Function Number List.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 127

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a
ring tone range (0~4) to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension
key (Program 15-07). If you enable ringing for the key in Program 15-09, the key
rings with the tone you set in this program. Also see Program 22-03. The chart below
shows the available tones. There are 256 available extension ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Incoming Ring Pattern
Default
Description
No.
01
0
= Tone Pattern 1
0: Tone Pattern 1
When an extension or a virtual
1
= Tone Pattern 2
extension is assigned to the function
2
= Tone Pattern 3
key on the key telephone, select the
3
= Tone Pattern 4
ring tone when receiving a call on that
4
= Incoming Ring
key.
Tone Extension
For ACD CAR keys, only tone pattern
1 (entry 0) can be used. The
remaining patterns are not checked
with this feature.
2 - 128
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1

Table 2-4 Program 15 : 08 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Incoming Signal
Frequency
Type
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Modulation
Pattern
Pattern 1
High
1100
1400
16Hz
Middle
660
760
16Hz
Low
520
660
16Hz
Pattern 2
High
1100
1400
8Hz
Middle
660
760
8Hz
Low
520
660
8Hz
Pattern 3
High
1100
1100
Envelope
Middle
660
660
Envelope
Low
520
520
Envelope
Pattern 4
High
1100
1100
No modulation
Middle
660
660
No modulation
Low
520
520
No modulation
Internal Incoming Signal
High
1100
1400
8Hz
Frequency
Middle
660
760
8Hz
Low
520
660
8Hz
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 129

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing
options for an extension's Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer
Key which is defined in Program 15-07. You make an assignment for each Night
Service Mode.
Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15-01.
Program Virtual Extension keys in Program 15-07 (code ,03). There are 256 Virtual
Extension Ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Key Number
01~48
Item
Day/Night Mode
Ringing
Default
No.
01
1~8
0
= No Ringing
0
1
= Ring
Conditions
H Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before
removing the key from keyset programming.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage
2 - 130
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set
the priority (1-4) for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When
Virtual Extension calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest
order number (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys just flash. There are 256 Virtual
Extension ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Item
Related
Order
Data
Description
No.
Program
01
1~4
0
= Tone Pattern 1
In the case of that two or more
15-08
1
= Tone Pattern 2
virtual extensions are set on a
2
= Tone Pattern 3
function key on the keyset, and
3
= Tone Pattern 4
the tone pattern by which the
4
= Incoming Extension
sound of each extension differs,
Ring Tone
the priority of ring sound is set up.
Default
H By default, Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order.
Ring Tone
Order
(Set in Program 15-08)
1
0
2
1
3
2
4
3
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 131

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage
2 - 132
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the
delayed ringing options for an extension's Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension
Group Answer keys (defined in Program 15-09). You make an assignment for each
Night Service Mode. There are 256 Virtual Extension Ports.
Assign extension numbers (Program 11-04) and names (Program 15-01) to virtual
extension ports. Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in
Program 15-07 (code ,03).
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Key Number
01~48
Item
Related
Day/Night Mode
Ringing
Default
No.
Program
01
1~8
0
= Immediate
0
20-04-03
Ring
1
= Delayed Ring
Conditions
H Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from a
keyset's programming.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 133

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set
the ACI Conversation Recording destination for each extension.

If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12
will be followed.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Number
01
ACI Recording Destination Extension Number
Maximum 8
No Setting
Enter the ACI's extension number to which the trunk
Digits
calls should be recorded.
02
ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls
0
= Off
0
Determine if an extension's incoming calls should be
1
= On
automatically recorded to the ACI.
03
--- Not Used ---
04
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 134
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys to define the One-Touch
key data for each multiline terminal.
For each Electra Elite IPK II Wireless telephone to use the Transfer When Out of
Range feature, enter the destination number (up to 24 digits) and name (up to 12
characters) into One-Touch bin 10. Make sure to add any required trunk access
codes for outside numbers. If this bin information is changed either through 15-14-01
or through user programming, the destination for the transferred calls is also
changed.
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Key Number
01~10
Item
Dial Data
Name
Default
No.
01
1~0, ,, #, Pause, Hook-
Up to 24 Digits
No Setting
flash,
@ (Code for Answer-Wait)
Up to 24 digits
02
Name
Up to 12 Digits
No Setting
Default
H No entries for any extension.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
One-Touch Keys
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 135

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-15 : Wireless DECT Terminal Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-15 : Wireless DECT Terminal Basic Data Setup to define the
options for the Electra Elite IPK II Wireless telephones.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
IPEI
This program is
-
The IPEI (International Portable Equipment
read only.
Identity) is a unique number embedded into
each Electra Elite IPK II Wireless DECT
telephone. The IPEI number is the 13-digit
serial number which is located on the label
in the telephone telephone's battery
compartment. Use this program to display
the IPEI number assigned to an Electra Elite
IPK II Wireless telephone during the
telephone subscription. This program is
read only.
02
Authentication Code
This program is
-
This program displays the 4-digit AC
read only.
(Authentication Code) assigned to the
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless DECT
telephone during the telephone
subscription. This program is read only.
2 - 136
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
03
Terminal Capability
This program is
-
This program displays the capability of the
read only.
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless DECT
telephone displaying the options below.
This program is read only.
H
Display Capabilities
H
ISDN Support
H
Tone Capabilities
H
Data Services Profile E Class 2
H
Echo Parameters
H
Data Services Profile A/B Class 2
H
Portable Part Ambient Noise Rejection
(N-REJ)
H
Multi-Bearers Support for Data
Services Profile
H
Adaptive Volume Control Provision
(A-Vol)
H
Data Services Profile C Class 2
H
Slot Type Capability
H
Data Services Profile D Class 2
H
Number of Stored Display Characters
H
Data Services Profile F Class 2
H
Number of Lines in Display
H
DECT/GSM Interworking - GSM
Bearer Service
H
Number of Characters Per Line
H
DECT/GSM Interworking - GSM SMS
Service
H
Scrolling Behavior Field
H
DECT/GSM Interworking - GSM
Facsimile Service
H
GAP/PAP Support
H
Control Codes
H
DECT/GSM Interworking Profile
Supported
H
ISO8859-1 Support
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 137

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
04
Model Identifier
This program is
-
read only.
This program shows the model identifier that
the Electra Elite IPK II Wireless DECT terminal
uses. The model identifier contains the
following items: Manufacturer Identification
Code (MANIC) and Model Identification Code
(MODIC). This program is read only.
05
Voice Mail Answering When Out of Range
0
= No
0
15-15-05
15-15-06
This program enables (1) or disables (0) the
1
= Yes
ability for calls to be transferred to voice mail if
the Electra Elite IPK II Wireless DECT
telephone is out of range. If Program 15-15-05
and 15-15-06 are both enabled, Program 15-
15-05 takes priority. If both programs are
disabled, the caller hears a lock-out tone and
the may see "Out of Range" on their display.
06
Call Transferring When Out of Range
0
= No
0
15-15-05
15-15-06
This program enables (1) or disables (0) the
1
= Yes
ability for calls to be transferred to another
extension if the Electra Elite IPK II Wireless
DECT telephone is out of range. If Program
15-15-05 and 15-15-06 are both enabled,
Program 15-15-05 takes priority. If both
programs are disabled, the caller hears a lock-
out tone and the may see "Out of Range" on
their display.
07
DECT Transmit Level
32
08
DECT Receive Level
32
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless DECT
2 - 138
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-17 : CO Message Indication to set the message waiting LED
Flash assignment on each CO line.
Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions
Up to 8 digits
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
LED Flash Assignment
0 = LED Off
0
1 = LED On
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 139

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to define the
operation when a Virtual Extension Key is pressed.
Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions
Up to 8 digits
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode
0 = Release
0
20-04-01
1 = Land on the key
02
Display mode when placing a call on
0 = Secondary
0
Virtual Extension Key
Extension Name
1 = Actual Station
Name
Default Settings
H If a DIL rings a Virtual Extension, the Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode must
be set to Land On, or the multiline terminal must have a CAP Key.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 140
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment to assign a name to each
LCD Line Key of the DTH/DTR-16LD-1 and 16LD-R ADM. Up to eight characters can
be assigned.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Key Number
01~16 (for 16LD TEL)
17~32 (for 16LD ADM)
Default Settings
Line Key
Name
LK01
CO001
:
:
LK08
CO008
LK09
All Blank
:
:
LK32
All Blank
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 141

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 142
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the
function mode for each department group. There are 64 Department Groups
Program
available.
Input Data
Department Group Number
0~64
16
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Department Name
Max. 12 characters
No
11-07
setting
02
Department Calling Cycle
0
= Normal Routing
0
16-02
Use this option to set the call
(Priority)
routing for Department Calling.
1
= Easy - UCD
Routing can be either circular
Routing (Circular)
(cycles to all phones in group)
or priority (cycles to highest
priority extensions first).
03
Department Routing when
0
= Normal (Intercom
0
16-02
Busy (Auto Step Call)
caller to busy
Use this option to set how the
department
system routes an Intercom call
member hears
to a busy Department Group
busy)
member. Intercom callers to the
1
= Circular (Intercom
extension can either hear busy
callers to busy
or route to the first available
department
department number. This only
member routes to
occurs for calls to the extension
idle member)
directly, not the department
number assigned in Program
11-07.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 143

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
04
Hunting Mode
0
= Last extension is
0
Use this option to set the action
called and hunting
taken when a call reaches the
is stopped
last extension in the Department
1
= Circular
Group (0=hunting stopped,
1 =hunting repeats with circular
routing through the Department
Group.
05
Extension Group All Ring
0
= Manual
0
11-16-10
Mode Operation
1
= Automatic
Determine whether calls ringing
a Department Group should ring
all extensions in the group
simultaneously automatically or
manually when using the
service code defined in Program
11-12-09.
06
STG Withdraw Mode
0 = Disable (Camp On)
0
1 = Enable (Overflow
Mode)
07
Call Recall Restriction for
0
= Disable (Recall)
0
STG
1
= Enable (No
Determine whether a or not an
Recall)
unanswered call transferred to a
Department Group should recall
the extension from which it was
transferred.
08
Queuing for Extension Group
0
= No Queuing
0
Call
1
= Queuing
To have Department Group calls
(This program allows
queue when busy, set this entry
entries of 1-32, however,
to "1" for an extension or voice
the system accepts any
mail group.
entry other than "0" to
allow queuing.)
09
Department Hunting No
0~64800 seconds
15
Answer Time
Set how long a call will ring a
Department group extension
before hunting occurs.
10
Enhanced Hunt Type
0
= No queuing
0
Set the type of hunting for each
1
= Hunting When
Extension (Department) Group.
Busy
2
= Hunting When
Not Answered
3
= Hunting When
Busy or No
Answer
2 - 144
Program 16 : Department Group Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Department Calling
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 145

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to set the
Department Groups. The system uses these groups (64 Department Groups) for
Department Calling. Assign pilot numbers to Department Groups you set up in
Program 11-07. This lets system users place calls to the departments. Use Program
16-01 to set the priority of each extension within each Department Group. When a call
comes into the group, it may ring the extensions in order of their priority.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Group
Related
Priority
Default
Description
No.
Number
Program
01
1~64
1~999
1 xxx
Set up the Department Group called
11-07
(See
by the pilot number and the extension
16-01
Note)
priority when a group is called.
Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23-
02.

The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Program 11-02 and 11-04.
(Extension ports are 1~ 256. Virtual extension ports are 1-256.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Department Calling
2 - 146
Program 16 : Department Group Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-03 : Secondary Department Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department
Group for extensions. Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per a Department Group.
There are 64 Department Groups available.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
01~64
Secondary
Item
Extension
Priority
Extension
Description
No.
Number
Order
Number
01
1~16
Maximum 8
0~999
This program is set up when placing
digits
telephones into two or more groups.
Default
H All extension groups : No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Department Calling
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 147

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 148
Program 16 : Department Group Setup

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various system options.
Input Data
Program
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
Program
01
Operator Access
0
= Step
0
Use this program to set up priority of
20-17
Mode
1
= Circular
a call when calling an operator
20
telephone.
02
Text Message Mode
0
= Call mode
1
Use this program to select the mode
11-11-14
1
= N o Answer/
when calling the telephone which set
15-07-08
Busy mode
up the text message.
03
--- Not Used ---
04
Network BLF
0~64800 in 100
0
Used to determine how often the
30-05
Interval
ms increments
system updates the DSS key BLF
indications.
For Networking, the entry should be
"30".
05
DTMF Receive
0~64800 seconds
10
For OPXs, analog telephones and
25-07-01
Active Time
certain analog trunks (like DISA), the
system attaches a DTMF receiver to
the port for this interval. The system
releases the receiver after the
interval expires.
06
Alarm Duration
0~64800 seconds
30
This interval sets the duration of the
alarm signal.
07
Callback Ring
0~64800 seconds
15
Callback rings an extension for this
11-12-05
Duration Time
interval.
15-07-35
08
Trunk Queuing
0~64800 seconds
15
Trunk Queuing callback rings an
11-12-05
Callback Time
extension for this interval.
15-07-35
09
Callback/Trunk
0~64800 seconds
64800
The system cancels an extension's
11-12-05
Queuing Cancel
Callback or Trunk Queueing request
15-07-35
Time
after this interval.
10
Trunk Guard Timer
0~64800 seconds
1
12
Web Logout Time
1~86400 seconds
900
The system automatically logs out a
Web Pro session after inactivity
lasting this interval.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 149

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Refer to the Input Data table at the beginning of this section.
2 - 150
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones to set various
system options for multiline telephones.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
01
--- Not Used ---
02
Trunk Group Access Key
0
= Outgoing / Incoming
0
Operating Mode
1
= Outgoing
Use this option to set the operating
2
= Incoming
mode of the extension's trunk group
keys. The keys can be for incoming
access, outgoing access or both.
03
BLF Control (DSS Busy Mark)
0
= Idle / Busy (ON/OFF)
1
Set the conditions under which a
1
= Busy / Idle (ON/OFF)
Hotline, Reverse Voice Over or DSS
Console key indicates that an
extension is busy. Refer to the
Reverse Voice Over feature for more
information.
04
Retrieve the Line After Transfer
0
= Not Holding (No Keep)
1
Enable (1) or disable (0) an
1
= Holding (Keep)
extension's ability to answer a call
after it's been transferred, but before
it's answered.
05
Headset Busy Mode
0
= No
0
Set the conditions under which a
1
= Yes
headset extension is busy to
incoming callers.
06
Preselection Time
0~64800 seconds
5
When a multiline terminal user
preselects a line key, the system
remembers the preselection for this
interval.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 151

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Input Data (Continued)
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
07
Time and Date Display Mode
1~8
3
Set how the Time and Date appear on
Type 1: (12 hour) 10 MAR TUE 3:15PM
display telephones. There are eight
Type 2: (12 hour) 3:15PM MAR 10 TUE
display modes.
Type 3: (12 hour) 3-10 TUE 3:15 PM
Type 4: (12 hour) 3:15PM TUE 10 MAR
Type 5: (24 hour) 10 MAR TUE 15:15
Type 6: (24 hour) 15:15 MAR 10 TUE
Type 7: (24 hour) 3-10 TUE 15:15
Type 8: (24 hour) 15:15 TUE 10 MAR
08
LCD Display Holding Time
0-64800 seconds
5
09
Disconnect Supervision
0 = Disable (Off)
1
1 = Enable (On)
Use this option to enable or disable
disconnect supervision for the system
trunks.
10
Time Before Shifting to
0
= No
0
15-02-18
Power-Saving Mode
1
=
1 minutes
2
=
2 minutes
3
=
4 minutes
4
=
8 minutes
5
= 16 minutes
6
= 32 minutes
7
= 64 minutes
11
Handsfree Microphone Control
0
= Off
1
Use this option to control the setting
1
= On
for Multiline Terminal's Handsfree
microphone after being disconnected
and reconnected. If set to 0, the
microphone will always be off when
the terminal is reconnected. If set to
1, the microphone will remain in the
same state it was in when the
terminal is reconnected.
12
Forced Intercom RIng (ICM Call
0
= Disable (Voice)
0
Type)
1
= Enable (Signal)
Use this option to enable or disable
Forced Intercom Ringing. If enabled,
incoming Intercom calls normally ring.
If disabled, Intercom calls voice-
announce.
13
--- Not Used ---
14
Headset Ringing Cancel Timer
0~64800 seconds
30 sec.
2 - 152
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data (Continued)
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
15
Caller ID Display Mode
0= Name and Number (Both)
0
1= Name
2= Number
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 153

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up
various options for single line telephones.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode
0
= Hookflash
0
11-12-47
For a busy single line (500/2500 type)
(Hooking)
telephone, set the mode used to answer a
1
= Hookflash +
camped-on trunk call.
Service
For ESL sets, enabling this option (1) allows
Code 654
the user to dial Service Code for Voice Mail
Conversation Record.
02
Ignore Received DP Dial on DTMF SLT Port
0
= Do Not
0
15-03-01
Use this option to define whether the system
Ignore (No)
should receive dial pulse and DTMF signals
1
= Ignore (Yes)
(0) or ignore dial pulse and only accept DTMF
signals (1).
03
SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines
0
= Receive all
0
20-03-04
H
Type 0: The system keeps the digits
dialed data,
dialed by the single line telephone on a
before
trunk in a buffer. After all the digits have
sending (All)
been received, the system sends all the
1
= Direct
digits to the trunk. If the time space
through out
between digits is longer than the timer in
Item 4, the system considers all digits
(Direct)
received.
H
Type 1: The system passes the received
digits from the single line telephone to the
trunk immediately. If the single line
telephone has a Last Number Dial key
without a pause, this key may not be able
to use the Last Number Dial key with the
Type 1 setting.
When using a third-party external paging
device, set this option to 1. In addition, set
Program 20-03-04 to 1. These programs must
be set in order for DECT Wireless users to be
able to break dial tone on an analog trunk that
is used for paging.
2 - 154
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
04
Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS
0~64800 seconds
3
20-03-03
When ARS or an analog extension user
accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the
system waits this interval before outdialing the
first digit.
When using a third-party external paging
device, set this option to 1. In addition, set
Program 20-03-03 to 1.
05
SLT Operation Mode
0
= Normal
0
Mode
1
= Extended
Mode1
2
= Extended
Mode2
06
Headset Ringing Start Time
0~64800 seconds
5
20-13-38
Define the headset ringing start time. After this
timer expires from the time when a single line
telephone is off-hook, the system will set the
single line telephone to headset ringing mode.
07
Trunk call dial forced sending start time
0~64800 seconds
0
20-03-03
(Forced Dial)
20-03-04
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Single Line Telephones, Analog
J
Single Line Telephones, Digital
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 155

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various
system options for Virtual Extensions. There are 256 available virtual extension ports.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
--- Not Used ---
02
--- Not Used ---
-
03
CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay
0~64800 seconds
10
Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual Extensions set
for Delayed Ringing (see Program 15-11)
ring the extension after this interval.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Call Arrival Keys (CAR) / Secondary Incoming Extensions / Virtual Extensions
2 - 156
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service
(COS) to an extension. There are15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To
specify the options in each Class of Service, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13.
You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Day/Night
Class of Service
No.
Mode
for Extensions
01
1~8
1~15
Default
H Extension number 101 as Class 15.
H All other extension numbers are set as Class 1.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Class of Service
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 157

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the
administrator service availability for each extension's Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
Program
COS
COS 15
1~14
01
Manual Night Service Enabled
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension for manual
0
1
11-10-01
1 = On
Night Service Switching.
02
Changing the Music on Hold Tone
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension to change the
0
1
11-10-02
1 = On
Music on Hold tone.
03
Time Setting
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension to set the Time
1
1
11-10-03
1 = On
via Service Code 728.
04
Storing Speed Dialing Entries
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension to store System
1
1
11-10-04
1 = On
or Group Speed Dialing numbers.
05
Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
0 = Off
11-10-06
Turns off or on an extension's ability to use
0
0
11-10-07
1 = On
the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service
11-10-08
codes.
06
--- Not Used ---
07
--- Not Used ---
08
--- Not Used ---
09
--- Not Used ---
2 - 158
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
Program
COS
COS 15
1~14
10
Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance Level)
0 = Off
11-11-38
Turns off or on an extension for
0
1
1 = On
20-13-18
programming the Appearance function keys
using Service Code 752 (by default).
11
Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-26
Turns off or on an extension to use Forced
1 = On
Trunk Disconnect.
12
Trunk Port Disable
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-27
1 = On
13
VRS Record (VRS Msg Operation)
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to
0
1
11-10-19
1 = On
record, erase and listen to VRS messages.
14
VRS General Message Play
Turns off or on an extension to dial 4 or
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-21
Service Code 611 listen to the General
1 = On
Message.
15
VRS General Message Record/Delete
Turns off or on an extension for dialing
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-22
Service Code 612 and record, listen to or
1 = On
erase the General Message.
16
--- Not Used ---
17
--- Not Used ---
18
SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension
0 = Off
Data
0
1
11-10-23
1 = On
19
SMDR Printout Department Group (STG)
0 = Off
Data
0
1
11-10-24
1 = On
20
SMDR Printout Accumulated Account
0 = Off
Code Data
0
1
11-10-25
1 = On
21
Register/Delete DECT
0 = Off
11-10-30
0
0
1 = On
11-10-31
22
--- Not Used ---
23
CO MSG Waiting Indication Callback
0 = Off
Number Programming
1 = On
0
0
Enable or Disable an extension's ability to
receive CO Message Waiting Indication.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 159

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
Program
COS
COS 15
1~14
24
Set/Cancel Private Call Refuse
0 = Off
Enable or Disable an extension's ability to
1 = On
0
0
11-10-32
set or cancel Private Call Refuse.
25
Set / Cancel Caller ID Refuse
0 = Off
11-10-33
Enable or Disable an extensions ability to set
1 = On
0
0
11-10-34
or cancel Caller ID Refuse.
26
Dial-In Mode Switch
0 = Off
0
0
11-10-35
1 = On
27
Do-Not-Call Administrator
0 = Off
25-01-07
1 = On
0
0
15-07-89
20-01-19
28
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Class of Service
2 - 160
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define
the outgoing call feature availability for each extension's Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
Program
COS
COS
01-14
15
01
Intercom Calls
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
Turns off or on Intercom calling for the extension.
02
Trunk Outgoing Calls
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
Turns off or on outgoing trunk calling for the
extension.
03
System Speed Dialing
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension's ability to make
outbound calls using system speed dial
numbers.
04
Group Speed Dialing
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension's ability to make
outbound calls using group speed dial numbers.
05
Dial Number Preview (Preset Dial)
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension for using Dial
Number Preview.
06
Toll Restriction Override
0 = Off
0
0
11-11-36
1 = On
21-01-07
Turns off or on Toll Restricting Override (Service
21-07
Code 663).
07
Repeat Redial
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension to use Repeat
Redial.
08
Toll Restriction Dial Block
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension to use Dial Block.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 161

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
Program
COS
COS
01-14
15
09
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
Turns off or on Ringdown Extension for
extensions with this COS.
10
Signal/Voice Call
Turns off or on an extension allowing it to force
0 = Off
1
1
Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom
1 = On
Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.
11
Protect for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
(Internal Call)
12
Department Group Step Calling
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension to use Department
1
1
1 = On
Group Step Calling.
13
ISDN CLIP
Determines if the ISDN calling line identity
0 = Off
0
0
10-03-05
presentation and screening indicators are
1 = On
allowed.
14
Call Address Information
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
15
Block Outgoing Caller ID
Turns off or on the system to automatically block
outgoing Caller ID information when a user
places a call.
0 = Off
14-01-20
0
0
1 = On
14-01-21
If this option is on, the system automatically
inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the user's dialed
digits.
16
Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
0 = Off
0
0
Turns off or on an extension to display the name
1 = On
and number of the extension that dialed 911.
17
ARS Override of Trunk Access Map
Turns off or on an extension's ability to override
0 = Off
0
0
the trunk access map programming for outgoing
1 = On
calls.
18
--- Not Used ---
19
Hot Line for SPK
0 = Off
0
0
20-08-09
1 = On
2 - 162
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Class of Service
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 163

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define
the incoming call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS
Program
01~14
15
01
Second Call for DID/ DISA/ DIL/ E&M
Override
Turns off or on the extension's ability to receive
a second call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line
caller.

With this option set to `1', the destination
extension must be busy in order for a
0 = Off
1
1
second DNIS caller to ring through. If the
1 = On
destination extension does not have a
trunk or CAP key available for the second
call and a previous call is ringing the
extension but has not yet been answered,
the second caller will hear busy regardless
of this program's setting.
02
Caller ID Display
0 = Off
Turns off or on the Caller ID display at an
0
0
15-02-08
1 = On
extension.
03
Sub Address Identification
0 = Off
Defines whether an extension displays the
0
0
1 = On
Caller Sub-Address.
04
Notification for Incoming Call List Existence
Determines whether an extension display shows
0 = Off
0
0
20-09-02
"Check List" when an incoming call is missed by
1 = On
a user.
2 - 164
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS
Program
01~14
15
05
Signal/Voice Call
Turn off or on an extension's ability to enable
0 = Off
11-11-15,
1
1
Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom
1 = On
11-11-16
Ringing for their incoming Intercom calls.
06
Incoming Time Display
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
07
Call Queuing
Turn off or on an extension's ability to have calls
0 = Off
1
1
20-13-06
queued if a call rings the extension when it is
1 = On
busy.
08
Calling Party Information
0 = Off
Turn off or on an extension's ability to display
1
1
50-02-05
1 = On
calling party information on CCIS calls.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Class of Service
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 165

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the
answer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
Input
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS
01~14
15
01
Group Call Pickup (Within Group)
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an
0 = Off
1
1
extension Pickup Group as well as ring group calls (Service
1 = On
Code 756).
02
Group Call Pickup (Another Group)
0 = Off
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a
1
1
1 = On
group (Service Code 769).
03
Group Call Pickup for Specific Group
0 = Off
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for a specific group
1
1
1 = On
(Service Code 768).
04
Telephone Call Pickup
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension to pick up a call ringing into a
1
1
1 = On
Pickup Group (Service Code , #).
05
Directed Call Pickup for Own Group
0 = Off
Turns off or on Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing an
1
1
1 = On
extension Pickup Group (Service Code 756).
06
Meet-Me Conference and Paging
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension to use Meet-Me Conference
1
1
1 = On
and Paging.
07
Automatic Off-Hook Answer
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension to use Universal Auto Answer
0
0
1 = On
(no service code required).
2 - 166
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default
Item
Input
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS
01~14
15
08
Virtual Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turns off or on an extension to answer an incoming call on a
0 = Off
0
0
Call Arrival (CAR) / Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE) /
1 = On
Virtual Extension simply by lifting the handset.
09
Call Pickup Callback
0 = Off
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Call Pickup to
1
0
1 = On
pick up Callback calls.
10
Answer Preset
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 167

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define
the Hold and Transfer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
COS
COS
01~14
15
01
Call Forward All
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to initiate Call
1
1
1 = On
Forwarding All.
02
Call Forward When Busy
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to use Call
1
1
1 = On
Forward when Busy.
03
Call Forwarding When Unanswered
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to use Call
1
1
1 = On
Forward when Unanswered.
04
Call Forwarding (Both Ringing)
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to activate Call
1
1
1 = On
Forwarding with Both Ringing.
05
Call Forwardings with Follow Me
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to initiate Call
1
1
1 = On
Forwarding with Follow Me.
06
Unscreened Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to use
1
1
1 = On
Unscreened Transfer.
07
Transfer Without Holding
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to use Transfer
0
0
1 = On
Without Holding.
2 - 168
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
COS
COS
01~14
15
08
Transfer Information Display
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability for incoming
1
1
1 = On
Transfer pre-answer display.
09
Group Hold Initiate
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to initiate a
1
1
1 = On
Group Hold.
10
Group Hold Answer
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to pick up a call
1
1
1 = On
on Group Hold.
11
Automatic On-Hook Transfer
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to use Automatic
0
0
1 = On
On Hook Transfer.
12
Call Forwarding Off Premise (External Call
Forwarding)
0 = Off
0
0
Turns off or on an extension's ability to set up Call
1 = On
Forwarding Off-Premise for their telephone.
13
Operator Transfer After Hold Callback
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to have a call
0
0
1 = On
which recalls from hold transfer to the operator.
14
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction
Turns off or on the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
0 = Off
0
0
Restriction. If enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not
1 = On
possible.
15
VRS Personal Greeting (Message Greeting)
0 = Off
Turns off or on an Service Code 7 to record, listen to,
1
1
1 = On
or erase the Personal Greeting Message.
16
Call Redirect
Turns off or on a multiline terminal user's ability to
0 = Off
transfer a call to a pre-defined destination (such as an
1
1
1 = On
operator, voice mail, or another extension) without
answering the call.
17
Department Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Each
Telephone Group Transfer)
0 = Off
1
1
Turns off or on an extension user's ability to set
1 = On
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding for a Department Group.
18
No Recall
0 = Off
Allow (0) or deny (1) answered transferred calls from
0
0
1 = On
recalling the originating extension.
19
Hold/Extended Park
0 = Off
Determine if an extension's Class of Service should
0
0
1 = On
allow either a normal or extended Park.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 169

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
COS
COS
01~14
15
20
No Callback
0 = Off
0
0
Turns off or on an extension to receive callbacks.
1 = On
21
Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
Allow (0) or deny (1) an extension user's ability to set
0 = Off
0
0
up a tandem/conference call automatically when they
1 = On
hang up.
22
Restricted Unsupervised Conference
0 = Off
Allow or Deny an extension's ability to initiate an
0
0
1 = On
unsupervised conference.
23
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) -
CAR/VE Call Forward Set/Cancel
0 = Off
1
1
Turn on or off an extension's ability to set or cancel
1 = On
call forwarding for a virtual extension.
24
Trunk Park Hold Mode
0 = Non
Exclusive Hold
Set the hold type when a trunk call is put on hold by
(Off)
1
1
an extension.
1 = Exclusive
Hold (On)
25
Transfer Park Call
0 = Off
Turn off or on and extension's ability to transfer a
1
1
1 = On
parked call.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Class of Service
2 - 170
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)
Level:
IN
Description
This program defines the Charging Cost service availability for each extension service
class.
Default
Item
Input
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS
01~14
15
01
--- Not Used ---
02
Advice of Charge
0 = Off
0
0
ISDN-AOC
1 = On
03
Cost Display (TTU)
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Class of Service
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 171

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define
the supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
No.
Programming
COS
COS
01~14
15
01
Long Conversation Alarm
0 = Off
Turns off or on the Warning Tone for Long Conversation
0
0
1 = On
(not for single line telephones).
02
Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension to use Long Conversation
0
0
1 = On
Cutoff for incoming calls.
03
Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension to use Long Conversation
0
0
1 = On
Cutoff for outgoing calls.
04
Call Forward/DND Override (Bypass Call)
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension to use Call Forwarding/
1
1
1 = On
DND Override.
05
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to receive Off-Hook
1
1
1 = On
signals.
06
Automatic Off Hook Signaling (Automatic Override)
0 = Off
Allows a busy extension's ability to manually (0) or
1
1
1 = On
automatically (1) receive off-hook signals.
07
Message Waiting
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to leave Message
1
1
1 = On
Waiting.
2 - 172
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
No.
Programming
COS
COS
01~14
15
08
Conference
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to initiate a
1
1
1 = On
conference or Meet-Me Conference.
09
Privacy Release
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to initiate a Voice
1
1
1 = On
Call Conference.
10
Barge-in Monitor
0 = Off
Enables the extension Barge-in Mode to be speech
0
0
1 = On
mode (0) or Monitor mode (1).
11
Room Monitor, Initiating Extension
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to Room Monitor
0
0
1 = On
other extensions.
12
Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored
0 = Off
Turn off or on an extension's ability to be monitored by
0
0
1 = On
other extensions.
13
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal on ICM Call
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Continued
0 = Off
1
1
Dialing, which allows DTMF signal sending while talking
1 = On
on extension.
14
Department Calling (PLT No Called Extension)
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to call a
1
1
1 = On
Department Group Pilot.
15
Barge In, Initiate
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to barge in on
0
0
1 = On
other's calls.
16
Barge In, Receive
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to have other
0
0
1 = On
extensions barge in on calls.
17
Barge-in Tone/Display (Intrusion Tone)
Turns off or on the Barge In tone. If on, callers hear an
0 = Off
alert tone and their display indicates the Barge In when
1
1
1 = On
another extension barges into their conversation. If off,
there is no alert tone or display indication.
18
Programmable Function Key Programming
(General Level)
Turns off or on an extension's ability to program
0 = Off
1
1
General function keys using Service Code 751 (by
1 = On
default). (Refer to Program 20-07-10 for Service Code
752.)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 173

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
No.
Programming
COS
COS
01~14
15
19
Selectable Display Messaging (Text Messaging)
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to use Selectable
1
1
1 = On
Display Messaging.
20
Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert
(Restricted Operation Transfer)
0 = Off
Turns off or on operator alert when an extension
0
0
1 = On
improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
21
Extension Name
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to program its
1
1
1 = On
name.
22
Busy Status Display (Called Party Status)
0 = Off
Turns off or on the ability to display the detailed state of
0
0
1 = On
the called party.
23
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should display the reason
0 = Off
0
0
a call is being transferred to their extension (Call
1 = On
Forward Busy, Call Forward No Answer, DND).
24
Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key
Turns off or on a user's ability to press a line key to
0 = Off
0
0
barge into an outside call. The Barge In feature must be
1 = On
enabled if this option is to be used.
25
--- Not Used ---
26
Group Listen
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to use Group
1
1
1 = On
Listen.
27
Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, you can call a busy extension which is talking
0 = Off
1
1
on a virtual extension key. Program 20-13-06 (Call
1 = On
Waiting) must be set to off for this option to work.
28
Allow Class of Service to be Changed
0 = Off
Turns off or on the ability of an extension Class of
0
0
1 = On
Service to be changed via Service Code 677.
29
Paging Display
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to display paging
1
1
1 = On
information.
30
Background Music
0 = Off
Allows or Denys an extension to turn Background Music
1
1
1 = On
on and off.
2 - 174
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
No.
Programming
COS
COS
01~14
15
31
Connected Line Identification (COLP)
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
32
Deny Multiple Barge Ins
0 = Off
Allows or Denys an extension from having multiple
0
0
1 = On
user's Barge in to their conversation.
33
ACD Supervisor's Position Enhancement
11-13-10
0 = Off
11-13-11
This option must be on in order for the operator to use
0
0
1 = On
11-13-12
service codes in Program 11-13-10 through 11-13-13.
11-13-13
34
Block Manual Off-Hook Signaling
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to block off-hook
0
0
1 = On
signals manually sent from a co-worker.
35
Block Camp On
0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension's ability to block callers
0
0
1 = On
from dialing to Camp On.
36
Call Duration Timer Display
Turns off or on an extension's display of the Call
0 = Off
Duration Time. The system waits until the interdigit
1
1
1 = On
timer (Program 21-01-01) expires before beginning this
timer.
37
--- Not Used ---
38
Headset Ringing
0 = Off
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use the Headset
0
0
1 = On
ringing.
39
ACD Queue Status Display
Turns off or on the ACD Queue Status Display for an
0 = Off
0
0
extension Class of Service. Any extension which has
1 = On
this option enabled will also hear the queue alarm.
40
Do Not Disturb
0 = Off
11-11-08
Turn off or on and extension's ability to set or cancel Do
1
1
1 = On
15-07-03
Not Disturb.
41
Voice Mail Message Indication on DSS
0 = Off
Turn off or on the Voice Mail Message Indication for an
0
0
1 = On
extension on a DSS console.
42
Extension Data Swap Enabling
0 = Off
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Extension
1
1
11-15-12
1 = On
Data Swap.
43
--- Not Used ---
44
Live Monitor Enabling
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Live Monitor.
1 = On
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 175

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Class of Service
2 - 176
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable
DISA and tie line Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to
DISA users in Program 25-09. Assign tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15
DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined.

Analog trunk-to-analog trunk and ISDN trunk-to-ISDN trunk calls are supported by this
program. However, analog trunk-to-ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk-to-analog trunk calls are
NOT supported by this program.
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
Input
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS
01~14
15
01
First Digit Absorbtion (Delete First Digit Dialed)
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to absorb (ignore) the
first incoming digit. Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with
3- and 4-digit tie line service. This option does not apply to DISA.
02
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's ability
to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection
(ARS).
03
Trunk Group Access
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's ability
to access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code 704).
04
Outgoing System Speed Dial
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's ability
to use the System Speed Dialing.
05
Operator Calling
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's ability
to dial 0 for the telephone system operator.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 177

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default
Item
Input
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS
01~14
15
06
Internal Paging
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's ability
to use the telephone system's Internal Paging.
07
External Paging
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's ability
to use the telephone system's External Paging.
08
Direct Trunk Access
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's ability
to use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code #9).
09
Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point>
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller's ability to use
Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code ,3). This option is not
available to DISA callers.
10
Call Forward Setting by Remote via DISA
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
Enable or disable a DISA callers ability to use the Call Forward
service codes (Programs 11-11-01 through 11-11-05).
11
DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's ability
to use the Barge In feature.
12
Retrieve Park Hold
0 = Off
1
1
1 = On
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's ability
to retrieve a Park Held call.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Class of Service
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
J
Tie Lines
2 - 178
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring
type.
Input Data
Item
Ringing
Incoming Signal Type
Default
No.
Cycle
01
Normal Incoming Call on Trunk
1~13
8
02
PBX, CES Incoming Call
8
03
Incoming Internal Call
12
04
DID/DISA/VRS
8
05
DID/DDI
8
06
Dial-In in the E&M Tie Line
12
07
Door Box Ringing for SLT
8
08
Virtual Extension Ring
8
09
Callback
11
10
Alarm for SLT
5
11
VRS Waiting Message Incoming
6
Call

Table 2-5 Ringing Cycles
Number
Ringing Cycle
1
On
2
On:2.0 / Off:4.0
3
On:1.0 / Off:2.0
4
On:0.5 / Off:0.5
5
On:0.25 / Off:0.25
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 179

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-5 Ringing Cycles (Continued)
Number
Ringing Cycle
6
On:0.5 / Off:0.5 / On:0.5 / Off:1.5
7
On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:5.25
8
On:0.375 / Off:0.25 / On:0.375 / Off:2.0
9
On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:2.0
10
On:1.0 / Off:4.0
11
On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:4.25
12
On:1.0 / Off:3.0
13
On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:2.25
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
None
2 - 180
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display
Messages. There are 20 alphanumeric messages, up to 24 characters long. Use the
following chart when programming messages.
Use this keypad
When you want to. . .
digit . . .
1
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
2
Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
,
Enter characters:
, + , - . / : ; < = > ? B E S ¢ £
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are
needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming
mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)
CONF
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 181

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
When using DTP or DTU style telephones on the Electra Elite IPK II system, not all
the same characters are available.
Input Data
Selectable Display Message Number
01~20

Item
Text Data
No.
01
24 characters
Default
Number
Message
1
IN MEETING UNTIL ##:##
2
MEETING ROOM - ########
3
COME BACK ##:##
4
PLEASE CALL ###########
5
BUSY CALL AFTER ##:##
6
OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ##:##
7
BUSINESS TRIP BACK ##/##
8
BUSINESS TRIP ##########
9
GONE FOR THE DAY
10
ON VACATION UNTIL ##/##
11
MESSAGE 11
12
MESSAGE 12
13
MESSAGE 13
14
MESSAGE 14
15
MESSAGE 15
16
MESSAGE 16
17
MESSAGE 17
18
MESSAGE 18
19
MESSAGE 19
20
MESSAGE 20
2 - 182
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
H Time value "## : ##" must be followed by two spaces.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Selectable Display Messages
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 183

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-17 : Operator's Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-17 : Operator's Extension to designate an operator. When an
extension user dials "0" or "9" (defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the
operator selected in this program.
If you do not assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, system alarms appear on the
extension assigned in this option.
Input Data
Operator Number
1~8
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Operator's Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
101
11-01
20-01-01
Define the extension numbers which are
to be used as operators.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Intercom
2 - 184
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-18 : Service Tone Timers
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timer to set the values for the system service
tone timers. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and
default setting.
Input Data
Item
Input
Related
Item
Default
Description
No.
Data
Program
01
Extension Dial Tone
0~64800
30
After getting Intercom dial tone,
Time
seconds
a keyset user has this interval
to dial the first digit of the
Intercom call.
02
Busy Tone Timer
0~64800
15
seconds
03
Congestion Tone
0~64800
10
A Busy Tone when system
seconds
resources run short. (such as
DTMF receiver resources).
04
Call Waiting Tone
0~64800
10
This option sets the interval
Timer
seconds
between Call Waiting tones.
This timer also sets the interval
between Off-Hook Signaling
alerts.
05
Multiline Confirmation
0~64800
10
Tone
seconds
06
Interval of Call
0~64800
10
Waiting Tone
seconds
07
Intrusion Tone Repeat
0~64800
0
After a call is interrupted (such
Time
seconds
as Barge In, Voice Mail
Conversation Recording, Voice
Over, etc), the system repeats
the Intrusion Tone after this
interval. Normally, you should
enter 0 to disable this interval.
08
Conference Tone
0~64800
0
Interval
seconds
09
Warning Beep Tone
0~64800
60
14-01-18
Signaling Interval
seconds
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 185

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns
2 - 186
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for
the Caller ID feature.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Caller ID Displaying Format
0
= Fir st 1 0
0
(if displaying digits are more than 12 digits)
digits
(Upper)
1
= Last 10
digits
(Lower)
02
Caller ID Wait Timer
0~30 seconds
5
When an incoming CO call is received, the system starts
the timer. It will wait the programmed time for Caller ID
information from telco before connecting the CO call.
03
Caller ID Edit Mode
0
= Off
0
If Caller ID Edit Mode is disabled (0), no trunk access code
1
= On
will be added to the Caller ID. If this option is enabled (1),
the trunk access code entered in Program 10-02-05 will be
added to the beginning of the Caller ID.
04
Wait Facility IE Timer
0~64800 seconds
10
This timer is used with ISDN trunks to determine how long
the system will wait for the Caller ID name from the Telco.
05
Caller ID Sender Queing Time (Sender Wait)
0~64800 seconds
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Caller ID
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 187

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the
messages which will be displayed when no Caller ID information is received.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Private Call
24 Alphanumeric
PRIVATE
Characters
02
Call from Out of Service Area
24 Alphanumeric
OUT OF AREA
Characters
03
Call Information with Error
24 Alphanumeric
NO CALLER INFO
Characters
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Caller ID
2 - 188
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the system
options for the Long Conversation feature.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Long Conversation Alarm 1
0~64800 (sec)
170
14-01-15
The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after
this interval.
02
Long Conversation Alarm 2
0~64800 (sec)
180
14-01-15
After the initial long toll call warning tone,
additional warning tones sound after this
interval.
03
Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call
0~64800 (sec)
0
14-01-14
This timer determines how long the system will
wait before disconnecting an incoming call.
04
Long Conversation Cutoff for Outgoing Call
0~64800 (sec)
0
14-01-14
This timer determines how long the system will
wait before disconnecting an outgoing call.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Long Conversation Cutoff
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 189

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-22 : System Options for Wireless DECT Service
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-22 : System Options for Wireless DECT Service to define the
time the system waits before determining the Wireless DECT (DECT) phone is out of
range. For incoming calls, the timer begins when the call is received. If the time
defined here expires before the Wireless DECT phone starts to ring, the system
determines the phone is out of range and provides the out-of-range services
(indicates out-of range, transfers the call to voice mail or to another extension).
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
05
Out of Area Judging Time
0~64800 (sec)
8
06
Out of Area Talkie
0~48
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
2 - 190
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-23 : System Options for CTI
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the system options for the
CTI feature.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Delayed ring timer for CTI
0~64800 (sec)
30
02
ALERT replay time (CTI)
0~64800 (sec)
8
03
Trunk Virtual Bridge -TSP Driver
0 = Disable (No)
0
1 = Enable
Enable or disable the system to send trunk or virtual
(Yes)
extension information to the TSP driver.
04
The Timer that waits for an off-hook for Single Line
0~64800 (sec)
30
Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 191

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-25 : ISDN Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Send the Release Message After Subscriber Hangs
0
= Servic e Off
1
Up
1
= Servic e On
02
Progress Indicate Information Element Detect
0
= Servic e Off
1
1
= Servic e On
03
Bearer Capability Select from SLT Outgoing
0
= 3.1KHz Audio
0
1
= Speech
04
Send DT until user dials first digit (Local Dial Tone)
0
= Servic e Off
0
With Overlap Sending Mode, if the network side stops
1
= Servic e On
dial tone when CLI is included in the SETUP message,
the system sends dial tone until the user dials the first
digit instead of the network.
05
T305 Timer Start After Sending Disconnect
0
= Servic e Off
1
Message
1
= Servic e On
06
Call Proceeding Send Mode
0
= Servic e Off
1
1
= Servic e On
07
Local Busy Tone Mode Set When Disconnect
0
= Local Busy Tone
0
Message Received
Off
1
= Busy Tone from
NT (network side)
08
Use of Low Layer Compatibility (LLC)
0 = Disable (Off)
1
1 = Enable (On)
09
Use of High Layer Compatibility (HLC) Sending
0 = Disable (Off)
1
1 = Enable (On)
10
S-Point Terminal Seizes Analog Trunk
0 = Disable (Off)
1
1 = Enable (On)
11
Automatic Changing System Clock When Date/
0 = Disable (Off)
0
Time Information Element Received
1 = Enable (On)
2 - 192
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
12
Call Forward Options (Auto Connect Send)
0 = Normal - No
0
Message (Off)
Incoming Calls Forwarded Out Automatically Return
1 = Normal - No
Connect Message When Outgoing Call Receives
Message (On)
Alerting Message.
13
Local Busy Tone (Release)
0 = Off
0
Busy tone send when T-point receiving a RELEASE
1 = On
message from Network.
14
No Response Release Send
0 = Off
0
Operation mode setting for when second T303 timer is
1 = On
expired.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
ISDN Compatibility
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 193

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO to define the Multiplier for charging
cost to each extension service class.
Input Data
Service Class
1~15
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Value %
100~500
100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 194
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation
Level:
IN
Description \
Use Program 20-28 : System Options for Trunk to Trunk Conversation to define
system options for Trunk to Trunk Conversation.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
01
Conversation Continue Code
0~9, #, ,
No Setting
14-01-25
20-28-03
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
02
Conversation Disconnect Code
0~9, #, ,
No Setting
14-01-25
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
03
Conversation Continue Time
0~64800 seconds
0
14-01-25
20-28-01
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 195

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-29 : Timer Class for Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension to assign the timer class to each
extension. There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for
this Program, one for each Night Service Mode. This entry includes virtual extension
numbers.
The details of classes are assigned by PRG 20-31.

Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
01
Day/Night Mode 1~8, Class Number
0~15
0
0 = Not assigned
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 196
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks to assign the timer class to each trunk.
There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program,
one for each Night Service Mode. The details of classes are assigned by PRG 20-3.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
01
Day/Night Mode 1~8, Class Number
0~15, #, ,
0
0 = Not assigned
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 197

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment to assign values to the timers
on a class of service basis.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
01
Trunk Queuing Callback Duration Time
0~64800 seconds
15 seconds
20-01-08
02
Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
0~64800 seconds
64800 seconds
20-01-09
03
CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay Interval
0~64800 seconds
10 seconds
20-04-03
04
Intercom Inter-digits Time (Intercom I/D
0~64800 seconds
10 seconds
21-01-02
Timer)
05
Trunk Inter-digits Time (Trunk I/D Timer)
0~64800 seconds
5 seconds
21-01-03
06
Hotline Time Start Time (Hotline Start)
0~64800 seconds
5 seconds
21-01-09
07
Ring No Answer Alarm Time
0~64800 seconds
60 seconds
22-01-02
08
DIL/Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time
0~64800 seconds
0 seconds
22-01-04
09
DID Ring-No-Answer Time
0~64800 seconds
20 seconds
22-01-06
10
Hold Recall Time (Non Exclusive Hold)
0~64800 seconds
90 seconds
24-01-01
11
Hold Recall CallBack Time (Non Exclusive
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
24-01-02
Hold)
12
Exclusive Hold Recall Time
0~64800 seconds
90 seconds
24-01-03
13
Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
24-01-04
14
Park Hold Time Normal
0~64800 seconds
90 seconds
24-01-06
15
Delayed Call Forwarding Time (Call Forward
0~64800 seconds
10 seconds
24-02-03
No Answer)
16
Transfer Recall Time
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
24-02-04
17
DID/DISA No Answer Time (Disconnect or
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
25-07-02
IRG or VM)
18
Disconnect after Re-transfer to IRG
0~64800 seconds
60 seconds
25-07-03
2 - 198
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
19
Long Conversation Warning Tone Time
0~64800 seconds
180 seconds
25-07-07
(Trunk to Trunk)
20
Long Conversation Disconnect (Trunk to
0~64800 seconds
10 seconds
25-07-08
Trunk)
21
DISA Internal Paging Time
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
25-07-09
22
DISA External Paging Time
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
25-07-10
23
Page Announcement Duration
0~64800 seconds
1200 seconds
31-01-02
Conditions
H These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to
16 in 20-29-01 or 20-30-01. When the timer class is set to 0, the system-wide
timer is used.
H All defaults are the same as the system wide timers.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 199

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 200
Program 20 : System Option Setup

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the system
options for Outgoing Call Service.
Program
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
21
01
Seizure Trunk Line Mode
0 = Priority Route
0
14-05
1 = Circular Route
14-06
02
Intercom Interdigit Time
0~64800 (sec)
10
When placing Intercom calls,
extension users must dial each digit
within this interval.
03
Trunk Interdigit Time (External)
0~64800 (sec)
5
14-02-08
The system waits for this timer to
expire before placing the call in a talk
state (Call Timer starts after timer
expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are
not allowed until after timer expires).
04
Researched Time for DTD Circuit
0~64800 (sec)
5
14-02-05
05
Dial Tone Detection Time
0~64800 (sec)
3
If dial tone detection is enabled, the
system will wait this interval for the
Telco to return dial tone. When the
interval expires, the system assumes
dial tone is not present. To disable this
timer (and have the system wait
continuously), enter 0.
06
Dial Pause at First Digit
0~64800 (sec)
1
07
Toll Restriction Override Time
0~64800 (sec)
10
20-08-06
21-07
After dialing the Toll Restriction
Override codes, the system removes
Toll Restriction from the extension for
this interval.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 201

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
08
Preset Dial Display Hold Time
0~64800 (sec)
10
09
Ringdown Extension Timer (Hotline
0~64800 (sec)
5
20-08-09
Start)
21-11
A Ringdown extension automatically
calls its programmed destination after
this interval.
10
Dial Digits for Toll Restriction Path
0~24
0
If this option is programmed with an
entry other than "0", a call will not
have a talk path unless the user dials
at least the number of digits entered in
this option when placing an outgoing
call.
This means that an entry of 4 or
higher in this program will cause a
problem when dialing 911. Since it is
only a 3-digit number, the call will not
have a talk path, preventing the
emergency dispatcher from hearing
the caller. It is recommended that this
option be kept at its default setting of
"0" to prevent any problems with
dialing 911.
11
Inter-Digit Time for Toll Restriction
0~60
0
Path Control
12
Dial E911 Routing Without Trunk
0
= Trunk
1
Access
Access
If enabled (1), an extension user can
Code
dial 911 without first dialing a trunk
Required
access code or pressing a line key. If
1
= Trunk
disabled (0), an extension user must
Access
dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or
Code Not
press a line key before dialing 911.
Required
13
Alarm Ring Timer (E911)
0, 1~64800 (sec)
0
11-12-56
20-08-16
Use this option to set the duration of
(0 = Off)
the E911 Alarm Ring Time. If set for 0,
the E911 Alarm will not ring.
14
Forced Account Code Inter-digit
0~64800 (sec)
3
Timer
The system waits this interval for a
user to enter a Forced Account code.
15
Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
0
= Disable
0
15-01-05
(Toll Restriction)
(Off)
21-01-16
Enable or disable the Outgoing
21-01-17
1
= Enable (On)
Disable on Incoming Line feature.
2 - 202
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
16
Supervise Dial Detection Timer
0~64800 (sec)
20
15-01-05
21-01-16
With the Outgoing Disable on
21-01-17
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is
not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the system
determines the call is unable to
complete and releases the DTMF
receiver.
17
Restriction Digit in Outgoing
Digits 0~9
4
15-01-05
Disable on Incoming Line
21-01-15
With the Outgoing Disable on
21-01-16
Incoming Line feature, determine the
number of digits to be dialed before
the call should be disconnected.
18
Reset Dial After Failure of Trunk
0 = Disable (Off)
0
99-01-01
Access
1 = Enable (On)
19
Do Not Call
0 = No Service
0
15-01-07
(Off)
1 = Extended
Common Restriction
(On)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Central Office Calls, Placing
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 203

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program
14-06 routes to extensions.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Day/Night
Route Table
Related
Default
No.
Mode
Number
Program
01
1~8
0~100
1
14-06
(0 = No Setting)
14-01-07
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 204
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table
for Automatic External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Day/Night
Route Table
Related
Default
No.
Mode
Number
Program
01
1~8
0~100
1
14-06
(0 = No setting)
14-07-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Trunk Group Routing
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 205

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class to assign a Toll Restriction class to an
extension. The details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21-05 and 21-06.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Restriction
Related
Day/Night Mode
Default
No.
Class
Program
01
1~9
1~15
2
14-01-08
9: (Power Failure Mode)
21-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Toll Restriction
2 - 206
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the system Toll Restriction classes
(1~15).
Input Data
Toll Restriction Class Number
1~15
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
Program
01
International Call
0
=
Unassigned
1
This option assigns/unassigns the
21-06-01
Restriction Table
(No)
International Call Restrict Table
1
=
Assigned
for the Toll Restriction Class you
(Yes)
are programming. Enter
International Call Restrict Table
data in Program 21-06-01.
02
International Call
0
=
Unassigned
1
This option assigns/unassigns the
21-06-02
Permit Code Table
(No)
International Call Permit Table for
1
=
Assigned
the Toll Restriction Class you are
(Yes)
programming. Enter International
Call Permit Table data in Program
21-06-02.
03
-- Not Used --
04
Maximum Number of
1~4 = Table
0
Select the table (defined in
21-06-03
Digits Table
0
= Disable
21-06-03) to be used to determine
Assignment
(None)
the maximum number of digits
allowed for outgoing calls.
05
Common Permit
0
=
Unassigned
0
It chooses whether the table set
21-06-04
Code Table
(No)
up by 21-06-04 is referred to, or
1
=
Assigned
not referred to.
(Yes)
06
Common Restriction
0
=
Unassigned
0
It chooses whether the table set
21-06-05
Table
(No)
up by 21-06-05 is referred to, or
1
=
Assigned
not referred to.
(Yes)
07
Permit Code Table
1~4 = Table
0
Set the tables 1~4 when referring
21-06-06
0 = Disable
to the table set up by 21-06-06.
(None)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 207

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
Program
08
Restriction Table
1~4 = Table
0
Set the tables 1~4 when referring
21-06-07
0
= Disable
to the table set up by 21-06-07.
(None)
09
Restriction for
0
= Doe s N

ot
0
Use this option to enable/disable
Common Speed Dials
Restrict
Toll Restriction for Common
1
= Following
Speed Dialing numbers. If
Restriction
enabled, System Speed Dialing
numbers have the same
Check
restrictions as manually dialed
numbers.
10
Restriction for Group
0
= Doe s N

ot
0
Use this option to enable/disable
Speed Dials
Restrict
Toll Restriction for Group Speed
1
= Following
Dialing numbers. If enabled,
Restriction
Group Speed Dialing numbers
Check
have the same restrictions as
manually dialed numbers.
11
Intercom Call
0
= Disable
0
It chooses whether ICM incoming
Restriction
(No)
call is restricted.
1
= Enable
(Yes)
12
PBX Call Restriction
0
= Disable
0
Use this option to set how the
(No)
system Toll Restricts calls over
1
= Enable
PBX trunks. If you enable PBX
(Yes)
Toll Restriction, the system begins
Toll Restriction after the PBX
access code. The user cannot dial
a PBX extension. If you disable
PBX Toll Restriction, the system
only restricts calls that contain the
PBX access code. The system
does not restrict calls to PBX
extensions. Refer to the PBX
compatibility feature. Make sure
Program 21-05-04 (Maximum
Number of Digits Table
Assignment) allows for PBX Toll
Call Dialing (normally 12 digits).
13
Restriction of Tie
0
= Disable
0
It chooses whether the toll
34-08
Line Calls
(No)
restriction of the dial set up by 34-
1
= Enable
08 is enabled or disabled.
(Yes)
14
Trunk Transfer
0
= Not allow
0 (Not allow)
If this program isset to "1", you
Restriction on
1
= Allow
can transfer the outgoing trunk
Incomplete Dial
which you dialed incompletely.
15
Common Hold
0
= Not allow
0 (Not allow)
If this program is set to "1", you
Restriction on
1
= Allow
can hold the outgoing trunk which
Incomplete Dial
you dialed in restriction check.
2 - 208
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default
Item No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Class No. 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Class No. 2
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Class No. 3
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Class No. 4
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Class No. 5
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Class No. 6
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Class No. 7
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Class No. 8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
Class No. 15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Toll Restriction
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 209

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system Toll Restriction
data. Dial 1-9, 0, ,, # can be entered in each table.
Input Data
Item
Item
Table
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
01
InternationaL Call
1~10
Dial
Tables 1~10 = No
This option lets you program the
Restriction Table
(Up to 4 digits)
Setting
Restrict Table for international
calls. The system has 10
International Call Restrict Tables.
Each entry can be up to four digits
long.
02
International Call
1~20
Dial
No Setting
This option lets you program the
Permit Code
Permit Table for international calls.
Table
(Up to 6 digits)
The system has 20 International
Call Permit Table. Each entry can
be up to six digits long, using.
03
Maximum
1~4
4-30
Tables 1~ 4 = 30
This option selects the maximum
Number Digits
number of digits allowed in
Table
outgoing calls for each table.
Assignment
04
Common Permit
1~10
Dial
Table 1 = 911
This option lets you program the
Code Table
(Up to 4 digits)
Table 2 = 1800
Common Permit Code Table. This
Table 3 = 1888
table contains up to 10 codes you
Table 4 = 1822
commonly allow users to dial.
Table 5 = 1833
Table 6 = 1844
Table 7 = 1855
Table 8 = 1866
Table 9 = 1877
Table 10 = No Setting
05
Common
1~10
Dial
Table 1 = 900
This option lets you program the
Restriction Table
(Up to 12 digits)
Table 2 = 1900
Common Restrict Code Table. This
Table 3 = 976
table contains up to 10 codes you
Tables 4 ~ 10 = No
commonly prevent users from
Setting
dialing.
2 - 210
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Item
Item
Table
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
06
Permit Code
1~4
Dial
Table 1~4 = No Setting
This option lets you program the
Table
Permit Code Tables. If the system
(table)
(Up to 12 digits)
has Toll Restriction enabled, users
001~200
can dial numbers only if permitted
(Entry)
by these tables and the Common
Permit Table (21-06-04). There are
four Permit Code Tables, with up to
200 entries in each table. The
system permits calls exactly as you
enter the code.
07
Deny Restriction
1~4
Dial
Table 1~4 = No Setting
This option lets you program the
Table
Restrict Code Tables. If the system
(table)
(Up to 12 digits)
has Toll Restriction enabled, users
1~60
cannot dial numbers listed in these
(Entry)
tables. There are four Restrict
Code Tables, with up to 200 entries
in each table. The system restricts
calls exactly as you enter the code.
08
PBX Access
1~4
Dial
Table 1~4 = No Setting
Use this option to enter the PBX
Code
(Up to 2 digits)
Access Code. When the system is
behind a PBX, this is the code
users dial to access a PBX trunk.
Toll Restriction begins after the
PBX access code. For PBX trunks
(Program 14-04) the system only
Toll Restricts calls that contain the
access code. Always program this
option when the system is behind a
PBX, even if you don't want to use
Toll Restriction. PBX Access
Codes can be up to 2 digits, using
0-9, #, * and LINE KEY 1 (don't
care). When using Account Codes,
do not use an asterisk within a
PBX access code. Otherwise, after
the *, the trunk would stop sending
digits to the central office. Entries
1-4 correspond to the 4 PBX
Access Codes. Each code can
have up to 2 digits.
09
Specific Dial
1~20
Dial
No Setting
Outgoing Code
(Up to 8 digits)
10
Outgoing Call
1~20
Dial
No Setting
Code Setup
(Up to 4 digits)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 211

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Toll Restriction
2 - 212
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll
Restriction Override codes to extension ports. Each code must be four digits long,
using any combination of 0~9, # and ,. Each extension can have a separate code, or
many extensions can share the same override code.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Related
Password
Default
No.
Program
01
4 Digits (Fixed)
No Setting
21-01-07
20-08-06
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Toll Restriction Override
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 213

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Repeat Redial Count
0~255
3
Sets how many times a Repeat Redial
automatically repeats if the call does not go
through.
02
Repeat Redial Interval Time
0~64800 (sec)
60
This timer sets the interval between Repeat
Redial attempts.
03
Repeat Dial Calling Timer
0~64800
30
(sec)
After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial
maintains the call after this interval. After this
interval, the system terminates the call, waits the
Repeat Redial Time (Timer 02) and tries again.
04
Time for Send Busy Tone for ISDN Trunk
0~64800 (sec)
0
Sets the timer (sec) to send out Busy Tone with
an ISDN line, when called party is busy.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 214
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-09 : Dial Block Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction
Class and Dial Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block
1~15
15
Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial Block
feature is used.
02
Supervisor Password
0~9, ,, #
No
(4-digit fixed)
Setting
Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable
or disable Dial Block for other extensions.
Conditions
H This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is
not an assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service,
everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Toll Restriction
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 215

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions to define the
Toll Restriction Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block
Restriction. If this data is "0", Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digit
Item
Toll Restriction Class
Default
No.
01
0,1~15
0 (No Setting)
(0 = No Setting)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Toll Restriction
2 - 216
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the
Hotline destination number for each extension number.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Related
Hotline Destination Number
Default
No.
Program
01
0, ,, #, Pause, Hook Flash,
No Setting
20-08-09
@ (Code to wait for a response)
21-01-09
(maximum 24 digits)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Ringdown Extension
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 217

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign
Calling Party Numbers for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is
made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned
(Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in
21-12.

If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system
sends the data in Program 21-13.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Calling Party
Default
No.
Number Data
01
1-0, ,, #
No Setting
(maximum 16 digits)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
ISDN Compatibility
2 - 218
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign
each extension a Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling
number is the subscriber number of the dial-in number. When a call is made by an
extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program
21-12), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program
21-13.

If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system
sends the data in Program 21-13.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Calling Party
Default
No.
Number Data
01
0~9, ,, #
No setting
(Max. 16 digits)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
ISDN Compatibility
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 219

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the
password and Toll Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code is six
digits long, using any combination of 0-9, # and ,.
Input Data
ID Table Number
1~500
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
User ID
Dial (6 digits)
No Setting
02
Walking Toll Restriction
1~15
1
Class Number
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Toll Restriction
2 - 220
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Route for Extensions to designate
the alternate trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk
Route Access Code. Refer to Program 11-09-02 : Alternate Trunk Access Code when
setting up alternate trunk codes. Refer to 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up the
trunk routes. When entering data for this option, enter the route number or "0" to
prevent routing.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Day/Night
Route Table
Default
No.
Mode
Number
01
1~8
0~100
0
(0 = No Setting)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Central Office Calls, Placing
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 221

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) to
define the toll restriction class to each trunk. The details of toll restriction are defined
by PRG 21-05 and 21-06.
This program is compared to Station Restriction Class. The higher class is applied.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
000~200
Item
Related
Description
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Restriction Class
1~15
1
14-01-08
21-05
Enter the Calling Party Number to be displayed
for each IP trunk used.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 222
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings define
the settings of CO Message Waiting Indication.
Input Data
Trunk
001~200
Item
Related
Description
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
CO MWI Call Back Enabling
0=No VMWI
0
Enable or Disable CO MWI Call Back.
Service
1=Enable
VMWI
Service
02
CO-MWI Call Back Number Area Setting
0000~1999
1999
Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI Call
Back.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 223

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 224
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the
system options for incoming calls.
Program
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
Program
22
01
Incoming Call
0
= Intercom
1
Use this option to determine if Intercom
15-02-22
Priority
Call
calls or trunk calls have answer priority
Priority
when both are ringing simultaneously.
1
= Trunk Call
Priority
02
Incoming Call
0
= Disable
0
If enabled, an incoming call that rings
22-01-03
Ring No Answer
(Off)
longer than the Ring No Answer Alarm
22-01-04
Alarm
1
= Enable
interval (22-01-03), will change to a
(On)
unique ring cadence to indicate that the
call has been ringing too long. If
disabled, this will not occur.
03
Ring No Answer
0~64800 (sec.)
60
If a trunk rings a multiline telephone
22-01-02
Alarm Time
longer than this interval, the system
changes the ring cadence. This
indicates to the user that the call has
been ringing too long.
04
DIL No Answer
0~64800 (sec.)
0
A DIL that rings its programmed
Recall Time
destination longer than this interval
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
05
-- Not Used --
06
DID Ring-
0~64800 (sec.)
20
In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer
22-12
No-Answer Time
Intercept, this interval sets the Ring-No-
Answer time. This interval is how long a
DID call rings the destination extension
before rerouting to the intercept ring
group.
07
DID Incoming
0~64800 (sec.)
20
Ring Group no
answer timer
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 225

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
Program
08
DID Pilot Call No
0~64800 (sec.)
60
answer timer
09
DID to Trunk to
0~64800 (sec.)
20
Trunk no answer
timer
10
VRS Waiting
0
= Enable
0
This program sets up the operation
22-14
Message
Always
mode for Auto Attendant and Queuing
22-15
Operation
22-08
1
= Change by
Message.
22-04
Manual
22-01-04
Operation
20-15-11
15-07
11
VRS Waiting
0~64800 (sec.)
20
Setup the sending duration time of the
22-14-06
Message Interval
Auto - Attendant & Queuing.
22-15-06
Time
41-11-06
The message is repeatedly sent out
within the specified time.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 226
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type
for each trunk. There is one item for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Day/Night
Related
Incoming Type
Default
Description
No.
Mode
Program
01
1~8
0
= Normal
0
Use this option to set the
14-04
1
= VRS (second
feature type for the trunk
dial tone if no
you are programming.
VRS installed)
2
= DISA
3
= DID
4
= DIL
5
= E&M Tie line
6
= Delayed VRS
7
= ANI/DNIS
8
= DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
Conditions
H When connecting to T1 trunks, after changing Program 22-02-01 to match the
Telco's connected T1 service type, the T1 cable or the T1 PCB must be
unplugged and then reconnected in order for the T1 PCB to sync.
H When the trunk type is set to a 3 (DID), the DID Transfert Destination in 22-11-04
for each DID feature is not supported. This feature is only supported for DID
trunks when assigned as VRS.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Central Office Calls, Answering
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 227

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the
trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone within the range selected when it rings an extension.
There are eight ring tones available. Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program
82-01.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Related
Ring Tone Pattern
Default
Description
No.
Program
01
0~8
0
Use this program to select the ring tone
15-02
(Ring Tone Pattern 1~4)
range for the trunk. The trunk uses a
ring tone within the range selected when
(Melody 1~ Melody 5)
it rings an extension. There are eight
ring tones available.
Table 2-6 Program 22 : 03 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Incoming Signal
Type
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Modulation
Frequency Pattern
Pattern 1
High
1100
1400
16Hz
Middle
660
760
16Hz
Low
520
660
16Hz
Pattern 2
High
1100
1400
8Hz
Middle
660
760
8Hz
Low
520
660
8Hz
Pattern 3
High
1100
1100
Envelope
Middle
660
660
Envelope
Low
520
520
Envelope
Pattern 4
High
1100
1100
No modulation
Middle
660
660
No modulation
Low
520
520
No modulation
2 - 228
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Selectable Ring Tones
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 229

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign
extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group
programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign trunks to Ring Groups and use Program
22-06 to set the ringing for the phones. An Incoming Ring Group (IRG) can have up to
32 extension numbers assigned.

There are 100 available Ring Groups.
Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number
1~100
Item
Extension
Related
Description
No.
Number
Program
01
Maximum 8
Use this program to assign extensions (up to
22-02
Digits
32) to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions
22-05
according to Ring Group programming.
22-06
Default
H Extensions 101~108 (first 8 ports) ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls. All other
extensions do not ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Ring Groups
2 - 230
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to
incoming Ring Groups. There are 100 available Ring Groups.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
00~200
Item
Day/Night
Incoming Group
Related
Default
Description
No.
Mode
Number
Program
01
1~8
0 (No Setting)
1
Use this program to assign
22-04
1~8 or 001~100
Normal Ring Trunks (22-02) to
22-06
Incoming Ring Groups
(Incoming Group)
(22-04).
101 (DSPII-U10
Internal Voice Mail
on Compact Flash)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail)
103 (Not used)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Ring Groups
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 231

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an
extension should ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Incoming
Item
Day/Night
Related
Group
Default
No.
Mode
Program
Number
01
1~8
0
= No Ring
1
22-04
1
= Ring
22-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 232
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-07 : DIL Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or
Department Calling Group for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension
directly, without any other Access Map or Ring Group programming. If an extension
has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. If the extension does not have a line key, the
DIL rings CAP keys. Use Program 22-02 to designate a trunk as a DIL). You can
make eight DIL assignments, one for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Day/Night
Number of Transferring
Default
No.
Mode
Destination
01
1~8
Extension Number (maximum 8
No Setting
digits)
Pilot Number
Conditions
H Program 22-02 must be set to `4' for the trunk.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 233

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Level:
IN
Description
For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to
assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the
DIL No Answer Time expires (Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also
reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group.
Make eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Day/Night
Incoming Group Number
Default
No.
Mode
01
1~8
0 (No Setting)
1
1~8 or 001~100 (Incoming Group)
101 (DSPII-U10 Internal Voicemail
on Compact Flash)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail)
103 (Centralized Voice Mail)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
J
Ring Group
2 - 234
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In
incoming calls for each trunk group.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
001~100
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Expected Number of Digits
1~8
4
Enter the number of digits the table
expects to receive from the telco. Use this
program to make the system compatible
with three- and four-digit DID service.
02
Received Vacant Number Operation
0
= Disconnect (Cut)
0
Use this option to enable or disable
1
= Transfer (Refer to
Vacant Number Intercept.
Program 22-12 : DID
Intercept Ring Group on
page 2-243.)
03
Sub-Addressing Mode
0
= Extension # Specify
0
(Intercom)
1
= DID Conversion Table
04
DID Receiving Mode for ISDN
0
= Enbloc Receiving
0
1
= Overlap Receiving
05
Local Code Digits
0~15 (0 = No Local Code)
0
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
06
Local Code
Dial (maximum 16 digits)
No Setting
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
07
Pilot Code
Dial (1 digit: 0~9)
No Setting
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
08
T302 Time-out Operation
0
= Disconnect (Cut)
0
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
1
= Transfer (Refer to
Program 22-12 : DID
Intercept Ring Group on
page 2-243.)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 235

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 236
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID
Translation Tables. There are 2000 Translation Table entries that you can allocate
among 20 Translation Tables.
Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number
01~20
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
01
1st Area Setup (Start Address)
0~2000
(0 = No Setting)
1st Area Setup (End Address)
See below
2nd Area Setup (Start Address)
See below
2nd Area Setup (End Address)
See below
Default
1st
2nd
Conversion
Table Area
Start
End
Start
End
Table
Table
Table
Table
1
1
100
0
0
2
101
200
0
0
3
201
300
0
0
4
301
400
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
20
0
0
0
0
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 237

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 238
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion to specify for
each Translation Table entry (2000):
J
The digits received by the system (eight maximum)
J
The extension the system dials after translation (24 digits maximum)
J
The name that should show on the dialed extension's display when it rings (12
characters maximum)
J
The Transfer Target 1 and 2
If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the
final transfer destination (Program 22-10).
J
Operation Mode
Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once
for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a "C",
press "2" three times.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be up to 12 digits
long.
Use this keypad digit . . .
When you want to. . .
1
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
2
Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 239

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be up to 12 digits
long.
Use this keypad digit . . .
When you want to. . .
9
Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
,
Enter characters:
, + , - . / : ; < = > ? B E S ¢
£
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are
needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space.
(In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to
accept and/or add a space.)
CONF
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.

Input Data
Conversion Table Number
1~2000
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Received Number
Maximum 8 digits
No Setting
02
Target Number
Maximum 24 digits
No Setting
03
DID Name
Maximum 12 characters
No Setting
04
Transfer Operation Mode
0
= No Transfer
0
1
= Busy
2
= N o Answer
3
= Both
2 - 240
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
05
Transfer Destination Number -1
0 = No Setting
0
1~8 or 1~100 = Incoming Group
06
Transfer Destination Number -2
0
101 = DSPII-U10 Voice Mail
400 = Allows the outside party to dial a
102 = In-Skin/External Voice Mail
different extension number in the
translation table (for example, ring no
103 = Centralized Voice Mail
answer to a dialed number, the caller then
201~264 = Extension Group
hears a dial tone, allowing them to enter
400 = Valid Extension Number
another Valid Extension Number).
401 = DISA
401 = Provides the caller with DISA
dialing options (requires the use of the
1000~999 = Speed Number
DISA password).
(000~999)
Note: This applies to 22-11-05 and 22-11-
06.
07
Call Waiting
0 = Disable (No)
0
1 = Enable (Yes)
08
Maximum Number of DID Calls
0~200 (0 = No Limit)
0
09
Music on Hold Source
0 = IC/MOH Port
0
1 = BGM Port
2 = ACI Port
10
ACI Music Source Port
When a sound source type is 2 in
0
above : (0~96)
11
Ring Group Transfer
0 = Disable
1
Enable (1) or disable (0) each
1 = Enabled
conversation tables ability to follow the
Ring Group programming defined in
Program 22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring
Group.
If Program 22-11-05 : DID Translation
Number Conversion, Transfer Destination
Number 1 and Program 22-11-06 : DID
Translation Number Conversion, Transfer
Destination Number 2 are set, the priority
of transferring will be in this order:
Program 22-11-05 then Program 22-11-06
then if Program 22-11-11 is enabled,
Program 22-12-01.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 241

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
H When the trunk type is set to a 3 (DID) in 22-02-01, the DID Transfer Destination
for each DID feature is not supported. This feature is only supported for DID
trunks when assigned as VRS.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 242
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group
Level:
IN
Description
For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to
define the first destination group for DID calls.
Depending on the entry in Program 22-09-02 and 22-11-04, the incoming calls will
route to the first destination group by the following:
J
Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that there is no phone connected,
no station card installed, or the extension number is not defined in Program 11-02)
J
Busy intercept
J
Ring-no-answer intercept
If the destination is '0', the calls will be forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in
Program 22-11 based on the table assigned to the DID trunk.

If Program 22-11-05 and 22-11-06 are set, the priority of transferring will be in this order:
Program 22-11-05 + Program 22-11-06 + Program 22-12.
For busy and no-answer calls, if the first and third destinations are programmed but the
second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destination after the first
destination. If the first and second destinations are not defined, but the third destination
is, the call goes directly to the third destination (as defined in Program 22-12).
Conversion Table Area Number
01~20
Item
Day/Night
Incoming Group Number
Default
No.
Mode
01
1~8
0 (No Setting)
1
1~8 or 1~100 (Incoming Group)
101 (DSPII-U10 Voice Mail)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail)
103 (Centralized Voice Mail)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 243

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 244
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the
DID Trunk Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group.
If you have more than one type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group.
For each Trunk Group, you make a Translation Table entry for each Night Service
mode.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
1~100
Item
Conversion Table
Day/Night Mode
Default
No.
Area Number
01
1~8
0~20
1
(0 = No Setting)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 245

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG (Incoming Group Ring) to
define for each incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and type of
tone for VRS Waiting Message.
Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number
1~100
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
1st Waiting Message Start Timing
0~64800 (sec)
0
02
1st Waiting Message Number
0~49
0
0 = No Message
49 = Fixed Message
03
1st Waiting Message Sending Count
0~255 (time)
0
04
2nd Waiting Message Number
0~49
0
0 = No Message
49 = Fixed Message
05
2nd Waiting Message Sending Count
0~255 (time)
0
06
Tone Kind at Message Interval
0 = Ring Back Tone
0
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
07
Disconnect Time After the End of VRS
0 = No Disconnect
60
Waiting Message
1~64800 Seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
None
2 - 246
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group to define for
each Department (Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind
for VRS Waiting Message. There are 64 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Extension Group Number
01~64
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
1st Waiting Message Start Timing
0~64800 (sec)
0
02
1st Waiting Message Number
0~49
0
0 = No Message
49 = Fixed Message
03
1st Waiting Message Sending Count
0~255 (time)
0
04
2nd Waiting Message Number
0~49
0
0 = No Message
49 = Fixed Message
05
2nd Waiting Message Sending Count
0~255 (time)
0
06
Tone Kind at Message Interval
0 = Ring Back Tone
0
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
07
Disconnect Time After the End of
0 = No Disconnect
60
VRS Waiting Message
1~64800 (sec)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Department Group
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 247

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-16: Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial
group number for Private Call Refuse.
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Speed Dial Group Number
0~64
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Department Group
2 - 248
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-17: Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern to
define Time Zone and Dial-In Conversion Table (PRG22-11) for Time Pattern.
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Received Dial
Up to 8 digits
No Setting
02
Start of Time
0000~2359
0000
(Time)
03
End of Time
0000~2359
0000
(Time)
04
Dial-In Conversion Table
0~2000
0
Number
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 249

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-18: Private Call Assignment Setup to define assignment and
incoming ring pattern for Private Calls.
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Transfer Mode
0~2
0
02
Destination Number
24 digits (max)
No Setting
03
Incoming Ring Pattern
0~9
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 250
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup
Groups. This program also lets you assign an extension's Call Pickup Group
priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at the same time, Group Call
Program
Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first.

There are 64 available Call Pickup Groups.
Input Data
23
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Group
Related
Priority
Default
Description
No.
Number
Program
01
1~64
1~999
1 xxx
Use this program to assign extensions to
11-12-26
Call Pickup Groups other than the
11-12-27
extension group set up by a Program
11-12-28
16-02.
15-07-24
15-07-25
15-07-26
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Group Call Pickup
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 251

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes (set in
Program 14-06) to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging
system is in an extension's assigned route, the user can dial the Universal Answer
code (#0) to pick up the call.
You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk
calls that ring other extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they
automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming
(defined in Program 14-06). The extension user's own ringing calls, however, always
have priority over calls ringing other co-worker's extensions. Refer to the Line
Preference feature in the Electra Elite Electra Elite IPK II Features and Specifications
Manual for more information.
Make one entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Day/Night
Route Table
Related
Default
Description
No.
Mode
Number
Program
01
1~8
0~100
0
Use this program to let an extension
14-06
user automatically answer trunk calls
that ring other extensions. When the
user lifts the handset, they automatically
answer the ringing calls based on Trunk
Group Routing programming (defined in
Program 14-06).
2 - 252
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Line Preference
J
Night Service
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 253

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the
off-hook automatic response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a
telephone.

There are 256 available Virtual Extension Ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Extension
Item
Related
Order
Group
Default
Description
No.
Program
Number
01
1~4
0-8 or 00-64
00
When an extension has a virtual
16-02
(0 or
extension assigned to a Programmable
20-10-08
00= Don't
Function Key, this program determines
Care)
the priority for automatically answering
the ringing calls when the handset is
lifted. If "0" or "00" is selected, when the
user lifts the handset, the user will
answer a ringing call from any group.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Call Arrival Keys (CAR)/Secondary Incoming Extensions (SIE)/ Virtual Extensions
(VE)
2 - 254
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the system options
for the Hold feature.
Program
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
24
01
Hold Recall Time
0~64800 (sec)
90
A call on Hold recalls the extension that
placed it on Hold after this interval. This
timer works with the Hold Recall
Callback Timer (Item 2).
02
Hold Recall Callback Time
0~64800 (sec)
30
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings
an extension for this interval. This timer
works with timer 01 (Hold Recall Time) or
timer 06 and 07 (Park Recall Time). After
this interval, the system invokes the Hold
recall time again. Cycling between timer
01 and 02 and 06 and 07 continues until
a user answers the call.
03
Exclusive Hold Recall Time
0~64800 (sec)
90
A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold after this
interval.
04
Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time
0~64800 (sec)
30
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an
extension for this interval. If not picked
up, the call goes back on System Hold.
05
Forced Release of Held Call
0~64800 (sec)
1800
14-01-16
Depending on the setting of Program
14-01-16, the system disconnects calls
on Hold longer than this interval.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 255

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
06
Park Hold Time - Normal
0~64800 (sec)
90
20-11-19
A call left parked longer than this interval
recalls the extension that initially parked
it.
07
Park Hold Time - Extended (Recall)
0~64800 (sec)
300
20-11-19
A call left parked longer than this interval
recalls the extension that initially parked
it.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Hold
J
Park
2 - 256
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-02 : System Options for Transfer
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the system options for
the Transfer feature.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
Busy Transfer
0
= Disable
1
Use this option to prevent or allow extensions to
(No)
Transfer calls to busy extensions.
1
= Enable
(Yes)
02
MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls
0
= Hold Tone
0
20-03-02
Use this option to enable or disable MOH on
1
= Ring Back
Transfer. If enabled (0), a transferred caller
Tone
hears MOH while their call rings the destination
extension. If disabled (1), a transferred caller
hears ringback while their call rings the
destination extension.
03
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
0~64800 (sec)
10
If activated at an extension, Delayed Call
Forwarding occurs after this interval. This also
sets how long a Transferred call waits at an
extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing
to the called extension's mailbox.
04
Transfer Recall Time
0~64800 (sec)
30
An unanswered transferred call recalls to the
extension that initially transferred it after this
interval.
05
Message Wait Ring Interval Timer
0~64800 (sec)
30
For SLTs without message waiting lamps, this
timer determines the amount of time between
intermittent ringing. If this timer is set to '0' then
the system rings once.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 257

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Input Data
07
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release Warning
0~64800 (sec)
1800
14-01-25
Tone
20-28-01
This timer will start when a trunk begins talking
20-28-02
20-28-03
with another trunk (for example: trunk-to-trunk
24-02-10
transfer, outgoing from trunk, Tandem Trunking).
When this timer expires, a warning tone is
heard. If Program 24-02-10 is set, the
conversation disconnects after that timer
expires. This timer is set again when the
external digit timer expires. One of the trunks
used must be an analog trunk (or leased line).
08
Delayed Transfer Timer for all Department
0~64800 (sec)
10
11-11-28
Groups
11-11-29
15-07-59
09
TBCT Retry Timer
0~64800 (sec)
10
10-03-16
(PRI)
10
Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk
0~64800 (sec)
0
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07
11
No Answer Step Transfer
0~64800 (sec)
10
14-01-26
12
No Answer Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
0~64800 (sec)
0
14-01-26
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Transfer
2 - 258
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-03 : Park Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The
system allows a total of 64 Park Groups. An extension can only pick up a call parked
in orbit by an extension in its own group.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Park Group
Related
Default
Description
No.
Number
Program
01
1~64
1
Assign an extension to a Park Group. The
15-07-01
system allows a total of 64 Park Groups.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Park
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 259

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign
the Speed Dialing number bin which should be used as the destination of the
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Day/
Speed Dial
Item
Related
Night
Area
Default
Description
No.
Program
Mode
Number
01
1~8
0~1999
1999
The destination telephone number of the
11-10-08
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer uses the number
13-04
registered into the Speed Dial. Use this
24-05
program to setup the Speed Dial Bin
Number.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 260
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the
Speed Dialing bin which is used as the destination of the extension for the Extension
Group.

There are 64 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Extension Group Number
01~64
Speed Dial
Item
Day/Night
Related
Area
Default
Description
No.
Mode
Program
Number
01
1~8
0~1999
1999
The Speed Dialing area is used to
11-11-27
program the destination number of the
13-04
transferred telephone number when a
24-04
Department Group's call is transferred
using the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
feature.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Transfer
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 261

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings to assign Call Forwarding Type
and the destination numbers for each extension/virtual extension. The destination
can be up to 24 digits long, using 0~9, ,, # and P (pause). Be sure to include the trunk
access code (e.g., 9) in the number if the destination is off-premise.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item No.
Input Data
Default
01
Call Forwarding Type:
0
0 = Call Forwarding Off
1 = Call Forwarding with both ring
2 = Call Forwarding when no answer
3 = Call Forwarding all calls
4 = Call Forwarding busy or no answer
5 Call Forwarding when busy
02
CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring,
No Setting
All Call, No Answer
1~9, 0, #, ,, P, R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
03
Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for Both
No Setting
ring, All Call, No Answer
1~9, 0, #, ,, P, R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
04
CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination
No Setting
1~9, 0, #, ,, P, R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
05
Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destination
No Setting
1~9, 0, #, ,, P, R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
2 - 262
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 263

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 264
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic
setting of each VRS/DISA line.
Program
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
25
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Program
01
VRS/DISA Dial-In Mode
0
= Extension Number
0
22-11
Service Code
Specify (Intercom)
1
= Use Dial
Conversion Table
02
DISA User ID
0
= Off
1
25-08
1
= On
03
VRS/DISA Transfer Alarm
0
= Norm al (Off)
0
1
= Alarm (On)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 265

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number
to be used as the Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as
a VRS/DISA.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Day/Night
Message (Talkie)
Additional Data
Default
No.
Mode
Source
01
1~8
0
= No Message
1: 01~48 (VRS Message Number)
0
1
= VRS
2: 01~16 (ACI Group Number)
2
= ACI
3: 1~8 or 01~64 (Extension Group
3
= Department
Number)
Group
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 266
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set
what happens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly
or waits too long to dial. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate
destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating
Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Day/Night
Related
Incoming Group Number
Default
No.
Mode
Program
01
1~8
0 (Disconnect)
0
22-04
1~8 or 1~100 (Incoming Group)
101 (DSPII-U10 Internal Voice
Mail on Compact Flash)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail)
103 (Centralized Voice Mail)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 267

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set
the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the
DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call
can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice
mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night
Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Day/Night
Related
Incoming Group Number
Default
No.
Mode
Program
01
1~8
0 (Disconnect)
0
22-04
1~8 or 1~100 (Incoming Ring Group)
101 (DSPII-U10 Internal Voicemail on
Compact Flash)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail)
103 (Centralized Voice Mail)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 268
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS
message number to be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each
VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS will answer, enter the VRS message (1~48) the outside
caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter "0" (i.e., no error message), the call
reroutes according to Program 25-03 and 25-04.
For each trunk, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Day/Night
VRS Message Number
Default
No.
Mode
01
1~8
0~48 (0 = No Setting)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 269

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single
digit dialing through the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions,
the company operator, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS
message set to answer outside calls (refer to Program 25-04 and 25-05), you specify:
J
The digit the VRS caller dials (0-9, ,, #). (Keep in mind that if you assign
destinations to digits, outside callers will not be able to dial system extensions.
J
The destination reached (eight digits max.) when the caller dials the specified digit.
The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice
Mail master number. A one-digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant
message.
Example:
Message Number=01, Destination=2, Next Message Number=0, Dial=399
In this example, when "2" is dialed by an outside caller, the system transfers the call to
"399". This means that extension 200~299 cannot receive calls from VRS/DISA users
during/after VRS Message 01.
Input Data
Attendant Message Number
01~48
Received Dial
1-9,0,,,#
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Next Attendant Message
0-48 (0 = No Setting)
0
Number
02
Destination Number
Up to 8 digits
No Setting
2 - 270
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
H Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same
first digit is defined here.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
J
Voice Response System (VRS)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 271

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA to set the value for the system
timers which affect DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of
each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
Item
Input
Related
Item
Default
No.
Data
Program
01
VRS/DISA Dial Tone Time
0~64800
10
25-04
(sec)
After answering a DISA trunk, the system waits this
interval for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA
password. If the caller fails to dial within this interval, the
system drops the call.
02
VRS/DISA No Answer Time
0~64800
0
25-04
(sec)
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for this interval
before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer.
After this interval expires, the call follows the
programmed Ring No Answer routing (set in Program
25-03 and 25-04).
03
Disconnect after VRS/DISA re-transfer to IRG
0~64800
60
(sec)
04
Calling Time to Automatic Answering Telephone Set
0~64800
10
(sec)
Set the answering waiting time of the automatic
answering extension when an incoming DID trunk call is
received.
05
Duration Time for Guidance Message by Automatic
0~64800
10
Answering Telephone Set
(sec)
Set the announcement time of the automatic answering
extension after which in incoming DID trunk caller is
disconnected.
06
Duration Time for Guidance Message by ACI
0~64800
10
(sec)
Set the announcement time by the ACI after which an
incoming DID trunk caller is disconnected.
07
Long Conversation Warning Tone Time
0~64800
3600
14-01-25
(sec)
20-28-01
Determine the length of time a DISA caller or any trunk-
20-28-02
to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation can
20-28-03
talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard.
2 - 272
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Item
Input
Related
Item
Default
No.
Data
Program
08
Long Conversation Disconnect
0~64800
10
14-01-25
(sec)
20-28-01
This timer determines how long the system will wait
20-28-02
before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk
20-28-03
(such as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the
Long Conversation tone is heard.
09
DISA Internal Paging Time
0~64800
30
(sec)
This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed
by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this
interval, the system terminates the DISA call.
10
DISA External Paging Time
0~64800
30
(sec)
This is the maximum length of an External Page placed
by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this
interval, the system terminates the DISA call.
11
VRS/DISA Answer Delay Timer
0~64800
0
(sec)
Set up the interval time the system will wait after
receiving an incoming VRS/DISA call until the system
will automatically answer the call.
13
VRS/DISA Busy Tone Interval
0~64800
5
(sec)
If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program
25-04 = 0), the system plays busy tone for this interval
before disconnecting.
14
Delayed VRS Answer Timer
0~64800
10
(sec)
Assign the delay time from switching from a normal
incoming status to DID mode. If this time is set to "0", the
call will switch to DID mode immediately.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 273

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each
user. There are 15 users each with one 6-digit password.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1~15
Item
Password
Default
No.
01
Dial
No Setting
(6 digits fixed)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 274
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of
Service for each user. When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program
25-08), the system identifies the user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of
Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of Service options in Program 20-14.
When programming DISA Class of Service, you make one entry for each Night
Service mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1~15
Item
Day/Night
Function
Default
No.
Mode
Class
01
1~8
1~15
1
Conditions
H DISA Class of Service cannot be 0.
H Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 275

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group
route chosen when a user places a DISA call into the system and dials 9. Set Trunk
Group Routing in Program 14-06. Enable or disable the DISA caller's ability to dial 9
in Program 20-14-02. You assign a route to each DISA Class of Service (1-15). The
system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA
caller dials.
When programming, you make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1~15
Item
Day/Night
Route Table
Default
No.
Mode
Number
01
1~8
0~100
1
(0 = No Setting)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 276
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN
Description
For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction
Class to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each DISA user (1-15). The system
uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 21-05 and 21-06. The Toll
Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service and
user, which is determined by the password the caller dials.
When programming, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1~15
Item
Day/Night
Toll Restriction
Default
No.
Mode
Class
01
1~8
1~15
2
Conditions
H Program 21-05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
J
Toll Restriction
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 277

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk
route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route
selected is based on the DISA caller's Class of Service, which is in turn determined
by the password the caller dials. When programming, you make a separate entry for
each Night Service Mode.
Use Program 11-09-02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 14-06
to set trunk routes.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1~15
Item
Day/Night
Route Table
Default
No.
Mode
Number
01
1~8
0~100
1
(0 = No Setting)
Conditions
H You cannot use Program 21-15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
J
Trunk Group Routing
2 - 278
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-13 : System Option for DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers
must dial before the system will allow them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS
messages. This program also is used to define additional DISA call options.
Input Data
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
VRS Message Access Password
1-9, 0, ,, #
No
6 digits fixed
Setting
Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system will
allow them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS messages.
02
--- Not Used ---
03
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
J
Voice Response System (VRS)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 279

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 280
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup

Program 26 : ARS Service
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service to define the
system options for Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
Program
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
26
01
ARS Service
0
= Disable (Off)
0
26-02
26-03
Enable or disable ARS.
1
= Enable (On)
26-04
02
Network Outgoing Inter-Digit ARS Timer
0~64800 (msec)
30
20-03-04
With Networking, this timer replaces 20-03-04
when determining if all network protocol digits
have been received. If ARS is enabled at Site
B, this timer can be programmed for 5 (500
msec) at Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is
using F-Route for outbound dialing, this timer
should be programmed for 30 (3 seconds) at
Site A.
03
ARS Misdialed Number Handling
0
= Route to Trunk
0
21-02
If a user dials a number not programmed in
Group 1
ARS, this option determines if the system
1
= Pla y Warnin g
should route over trunk group 1 or play error
Tone to Dialer
tone.
04
--- Not Used ---
05
--- Not Used ---
06
Class of Service Match Access
0 = Disable (Off)
0
26-02
1 = Enable (On)
07
F-Route Access COS Reference
0 = F-Route
0
26-02
1 = ARS
44-05
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 281

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 282
Program 26 : ARS Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR to set pre-transaction tables
for selecting Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
J
Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) - The number routes to a trunk
group.
J
Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) - The number is controlled by the F-Route table.
Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number
1~200
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
01
Dial
Dial Digits (16 digits maximum)
No
1-9, 0, ,, #, or for wild character (Press line key 1)
Setting
02
ARS Service Type
0 = No Service (None)
0
1 = Route to Trunk Group
2 = Select F-Route Access
03
Additional Data / Service
If Service Type 1 (in 26-02): Select Trunk Group
0
44-04
Number
Number (0~100, 0= No Route)
44-05
If Service Type 2 (in 26-02):
F-Route Time Schedule Not Used = 0~500
(F-Route Table Number).
Refer to Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table on
page 2-399.
F-Route Time Schedule Used = 0~500
(F-Route Selection Number).
Refer to Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection
for Time Schedule on page 2-398).
04
ARS Class of Service
0~16
0
05
Dial Treatment for ARS
0~15
0
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 283

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
Programming
06
LCR Carrier Table
0~25
0
Select the Carrier Table to
be used for dial edit. Table
1 is a special table - this
table will be automatically
used for all numbers that
begin with "0" and which
do not correspond with
the entry in Program
26-02-01.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 284
Program 26 : ARS Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for
automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers
(Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial Treatment options are:
J
3 - Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call.
Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
J
2 - Delete the leading digit if dialed as part of the initial call.
Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
J
1 - Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the initial call.
Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
J
INPA - Insert the NPA specified by NPA.
J
DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For
example, D041234 outdials 1234. Valid entries are 0-9, #, ,, Wnn (wait nn
seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code counts as a digit. So, for example, if a P
was added for a pause, the entry would look like: D05P1234.
J
Wnn - Wait nn seconds.
J
P - Pause in analog trunk.
J
R - Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications.
J
E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.
J
X - When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment in order for the
system to output the extension number of the call's originator to the black box for
the E911 feature.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 285

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II

Input Data
Dial Treatment Table Number
1~15
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Treatment Code
24 characters maximum
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 286
Program 26 : ARS Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-04 : ARS Class of Service
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set the ARS Class of Service for an
extension. Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining
how to route extension calls.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Item
Day/Night
Class
Default
No.
Mode
01
1~8
0~16
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Automatic Route Selection
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 287

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-05 : LCR Carrier Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-05 : LCR Carrier Table to set the Carrier Table for LCR.
Input Data
LCR Carrier Table
1~25
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Delete Digit
0~16
0
02
Access Code
16 digits maximum (0 ~9,
No Setting
,, # , @, Pause)
03
Authorization Table Number
1~10
0
04
Cost Center Code
0 = Disable (Not used)
0
1 = Enable (Use)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 288
Program 26 : ARS Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-06 : LCR Authorization Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-06 : LCR Authorization Table to set the Authorization Code Table
for LCR.
Input Data
LCR Authorization Table
1~10
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Authorization Code
10 digits maximum
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 289

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-07 : LCR Cost Center Code Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-07 : LCR Cost Center Code Table to set the Cost Center Code for
LCR.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 Digits
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Cost Center Code
8 digits maximum
Same as
extension
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 290
Program 26 : ARS Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table to set the Manual
Override Access Codes for LCR.
Input Data
LCR Manual Override Access Code Table
1~10
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Manual Override Access Code (Dial)
4 digits maximum
No Setting
02
Carrier Table
0~25
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 291

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table to set Manual
Override Exemption for LCR.
Input Data
LCR Carrier Table
1~25
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
LCR Manual Override Exemption Code
4 digits maximum
No Setting
Table Number
Default
1
999
2
112
3
No Setting
4
No Setting
5
No Setting
6
No Setting
7
No Setting
8
No Setting
9
No Setting
10
No Setting
11
No Setting
12
No Setting
13
No Setting
2 - 292
Program 26 : ARS Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table Number
Default
14
No Setting
15
No Setting
16
No Setting
17
No Setting
18
No Setting
19
No Setting
20
No Setting
21
No Setting
22
No Setting
23
No Setting
24
No Setting
25
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 293

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-11 : Transit Network ID Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table to define Transit Network ID for
Alternate carrier access, which is referred from PRG26-03.
Input Data
Transit Network ID Table
1~4
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Transit Network ID (Carrier ID)
0000~9999 (Fixed 4
No
Digits)
setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 294
Program 26 : ARS Service

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the
system DSS Consoles. The entry for this option applies to all the system DSS
Consoles. The available options are:
Program
J
Regular (Business) Mode (0)
J
Hotel Mode (1)
30
J
ACD Monitor Mode (2)
J
Business (BS) and ACD Monitor Modes (3)
Input Data
DSS Console Number
01~32
Item
DSS Operation Mode
Default
No.
01
0
= Busines s Mode
0
1
= Hotel Mode
2
= ACD Monitor
Mode
3
= BS/ACD
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
J
Hotel/Motel
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 295

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which
extensions have DSS Consoles connected.
J
Up to 32 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up. A single extension
can have up to four 60-button DSS Consoles (32 is the maximum allowed per
system).
When programming, each extension/DSS Console(s) combination is called a Console
Number. There are 32 Console Numbers (1~32). Console Numbers can be assigned
to extensions. When entering data, the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally
made first.
Input Data
60-button DSS Console Number
01~32
Item
Item
Description
Default
No.
01
Extension Number
The extension number for the multiline terminal
No
connected with the DSS console (up to 8 digits)
Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2 - 296
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignments to customize the key
assignments for 60-button DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function
up to four digits long (e.g., extension number or Service Code).
To prevent lamping problems when reassigning DSS Console keys, it is
recommended that you clear an extension's programmed key before reassigning it
[Enter key to be cleared + 00 or ,00 (If using Web or PC Programming, delete the key
assignments and upload the change to the system before proceeding.)] Without
clearing an extension key first, the DSS Console may not show the correct lamping,
although the DSS function works correctly.
If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is
connected, either by phone or using the Web or PC Program, you may need to unplug
the DSS and plug it back in to reset the console's lamping.
Input Data
Index 1
DSS Console Number
01~32
Index 2
Item
Key Number
Function Number
Additional Data
No.
01
01~60
0~99 (General Functional Level)
Refer to Function Number
, 00 ~ , 99 (Appearance
List on the following pages.
Functional Level)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 297

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Function Number List
[1] General functional level (00~99)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
00
--- Not Used ---
01
DSS / One-Touch
Extension Number or any
Red On: Extension Busy
Numbers (up to 24 digits)
Off: Extension Idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
02
Microphone Key (ON/OFF)
Red On: Mic On
Off: Mic Off
03
DND Key
Red On: DND
04
BGM (ON/OFF)
Red On: BGM On
Off: BGM Off
05
Headset
Red On: Under Headset Operation
06
Transfer Key
None
07
Conference Key
Red On: Under Conference Operation
08
Incoming Call Log
Rapid Blink (Red): New Call Log
Red On: Call Log
Off: No Call Log
09
Day/Night Mode Switch
Mode Number (1~8)
Red On: On mode
10
Call Forward - Immediate
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
11
Call Forward - Busy
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
12
Call Forward - No Answer
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
13
Call Forward - Busy/No
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Answer
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
14
Call Forward Both Ring
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
15
Follow Me
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
16
--- Not Used ---
17
--- Not Used ---
18
Text Message Setup
Message Numbers (01~20)
Red On: Feature active by Function Key
2 - 298
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] General functional level (00~99)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
19
External Group Paging
External Paging Number
Red On: Active
(1~8)
20
External All Call Paging
Red On: Active
21
Internal Group Paging
Internal Paging Number
Red On: Active
(01~64)
22
Internal All Call Paging
None
23
Meet-Me Answer to Internal
None
Paging
24
Call Pickup
None
25
Call Pickup for Another
None
Group
26
Call Pickup for Specified
Call Pickup Group Number
None
Group
27
Speed Dial System/
Speed Dial Number
None
Private
(Speed/Private)
28
Speed Dial - Group
Speed Dial Number (Group)
None
29
Repeat Redial
Rapid Blink (Red): Under a Repeat
Dial
30
Saved Number Redial
None
31
Memo Dial
None
32
Meet Me Conference
None
33
Override (Off-Hook
None
Signaling)
34
Barge-In
None
35
Camp On
Red On: Under Camp-On or
Reservation
36
Step Call
None
37
DND/FWD Override Call
None
38
Message Waiting
None
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 299

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] General functional level (00~99)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
39
Room Monitoring
Rapid Blink (Red): Under Monitored
Slow Blink (Red): Under Monitoring
With Room Monitor there are two parties
in the monitor, one being monitored and
one who is monitoring. The same key is
used on both phones, but the COS says
if the key is set to be either a monitored
or monitoring party.
40
Handset Transmission
Red On: Transmission cut-off
Cutoff
41
Secretary Buzzer
Extension Number
Red On: Transmission Side
Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side
42
Boss Secretary Call
Extension Number
Red On: Boss Secretary Mode
Pickup
43
Series Call
None
44
Common Hold
None
45
Exclusive Hold
None
46
Department Group Log Out
Red On: Logged Out
47
Reverse Voice Over
Extension Number
Red On: Extension Busy
Off: Extension Idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
48
Voice Over
Calling Party - Slow Blink (Red):
Under a Call, Under a Response
Called Party - Slow Blink (Red):
Under a Call, Under a Response
49
Call Redirect
Extension Number or Voice
None
Mail Number
50
Account Code
None
51
General Purpose Relay
Relay No (0, 1~8)
Red On: Relay On
52
Automatic Answer with
Incoming Group Number
Red On: Under Setting
Delay Message Setup
53
Automatic Answer with
Red On: Active
Delay Message Starting
54
External Call Forward by
Red On: Active
Door Box
2 - 300
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] General functional level (00~99)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
55
Extension Name Edit
None
56
Department Incoming Call -
Automatic Transfer
57
Department Incoming Call -
Delayed
58
Department Incoming Call -
Extension Group Number
Immediate
(1~8 or 01~64)
59
Department Incoming Call -
Extension Group Number
Delay
(1~8 or 01~64)
60
Department Incoming Call -
Extension Group Number
DND
(1~8 or 01~64)
61
--- Not Used ---
63
Outgoing Call Without
Red On: Active
Caller ID (ISDN)
64
--- Not Used ---
65
--- Not Used ---
66
CTI
Red On: CTI active
67
Mail Box
Extension Number or
Rapid Blink (Green): New Message
Department Group Number
Received
Red On: Listening to Messages
68
Voice Mail Service
0 = Play Skip
2-In case of monitor mode
1 = Play Back Skip
Slow Blink (Red): Monitor Setting -
2 = Monitor
Automatic
Red On: Monitor Setting - Manual
69
Recording Service (DSPII-
0 = Play Skip
U10)
1 = Play Back Skip
2 = Automated Attendant
Monitor
70
Automated Attendant for
Extension Number or
None
Extension
Department Group Number
71
Message Change for Voice
Extension Number or
None
Attendant
Department Group Number
72
Keypad Facility Key
73
Keypad Hold Key
74
Keypad Retrieve Key
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 301

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] General functional level (00~99)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
75
Keypad Conference Key
76
Toll Restriction in Credit
77
Voice Mail (In-Skin)
Extension Number or Pilot
Red On: Access to Voice Mail
Number
Rapid Blink (Green): New Message
78
Conversation Recording
0 = Conversation recording
Rapid Blink (Red): Recording
1 = Delete, Re-recording
2 = Delete
79
Automated Attendant
Extension Number or Pilot
Red On: Set Up for All Calls
(In-Skin)
Number
Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No
Answer Calls
80
Tandem Ringing
0 = Cancel
Red On: Active
1 = Set
Extension Number to
Tandem Ring
81
Automatic Transfer to
Trunk Line Number
Transfer Key
001~200
82
Dterm IP Call Log
83
Conversation Recording
0 = Pause
Function
1 = Re-record
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page
Function Number List
[2] Appearance Function Level (,00 - ,99) (Service Code 752)
Function
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Number
,00
--- Not Used ---
,01
Trunk Key
Trunk Number (1~8 or 001~200)
,02
Trunk Group/Loop Key
Trunk Group Number
(1~8 or 001~100)
,03
Virtual Extension Key
Extension Number or
Department Group Number
2 - 302
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Function Number List (Continued)
[2] Appearance Function Level (,00 - ,99) (Service Code 752)
,04
Park Key
Park Number (01~64)
,05
--- Not Used ---
,06
Trunk Access Via Networking
Network System Number
(01~50)
,07
Station Park Hold None
,08
CAP Key -- CAP Orbit No.
(01-64)
,10
ACD Log-In/Log-Out
Red On: Under Log-On
Off: Under Log-Off
,11
--- Not Used ---
,12
ACD Emergency Call
Emergency Call
Red On: Under monitor, Override,
Standby
,13
ACD Off Duty Mode
Red On: Under off-duty
Slow Blink (Red): Under
Reservation
,14
ACD Start / End
Red On: ACD Operation End
,15
ACD Monitor Mode
Red On: Under Monitor
,16
ACD Standby Mode
Red On: Standby
,17
ACD Wrap-Up Mode
Red On: Under work time
Slow Blink (Red): Under
Reservation
,18
ACD Overflow Control
ACD Group Number
Red On: Enable
Slow Blink (Red): Disable
,19
ACD Queue Status Display
Default
H The DSS keys 01~60 of all DSS consoles = DSS/One-Touch key 101~160.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 303

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 32-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for
functions on the DSS consoles.
Input Data
Lamp
Item
Item
Pattern
Default
No.
Data
01
--- Not Used ---
02
Busy Extension
0~7
7 (On)
03
DND Extension
0~7
3 (RW)
04
ACD Agent Busy
0~7
7 (On)
05
Out of Schedule (ACD DSS)
0~7
0 (Off)
06
ACD Agent Log Out (ACD DSS)
0~7
5 (IL)
07
ACD Agent Log In (ACD DSS)
0~7
4 (IR)
08
ACD Agent Emergency (ACD DSS)
0~7
6 (IW)
09
Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
7 (On)
10
Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
1 (FL)
11
Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
2 (WK)
12
Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
3 (RW)
13
Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
5 (IL)
14
Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
3 (RW)
15
Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
6 (IW)
16
Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
4 (IR)
17
Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
3 (RW)
18
Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
0 (Off)
19
Hotel Status Code * (Hotel DSS)
0~7
4 (IR)
20
Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS)
0~7
5 (IL)
2 - 304
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Input Data
Lamp
Item
Item
Pattern
Default
No.
Data
21
VM Message Indication
0~7
3 (RW)
Table 2-7 LED Patterns for DSS Console
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 305

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2 - 306
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to
define the system options for Internal/External Paging.
Program
The system shows the names you program on the telephone displays. Use the
following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits,
press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc.
For example, to enter a C, press key "2" three times. Press the key six times to
31
display the lower case letter.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be
up to 12 digits long.
Use this keypad
When you want to. . .
digit . . .
1
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
2
Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
,
Enter characters:
, + , - . / : ; < = > ? B E S ¢ £
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 307

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Key for Entering Names (Continued)
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be
up to 12 digits long.
Use this keypad
When you want to. . .
digit . . .
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key
are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system
programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept
and/or add a space.)
CONF
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.
Input Data
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
Program
01
All Call Paging
Up to 12
Group
Assign a name to each All Call
11-12-19
Zone Name
Characters
All
Internal Paging zone. The name
31-02-02
shows on the display of the
telephone making the
announcement.
02
Page
0~64800
1200
This timer sets the maximum
Announcement
(sec)
length of Page announcements.
Duration
04
Privacy Release
0~64800
90
Once the user initiates a
Time
(sec)
Meet-Me Conference or Voice
Call Conference, the system
waits this interval for the Paged
party to join the call.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Paging, External
J
Paging, Internal
2 - 308
Program 31 : Paging Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to
Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also
determines if the Internal Page Group can receive Internal All Call Paging. The
system can have up to 64 paging groups. An extension can be in only one Internal
Paging Group.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Internal Paging Group Number
0~64
0 for IP Station
(0 = No Setting)
1 for TDM Station
Assign extensions to Internal Paging
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system
allows up to 64 Internal Paging Groups. An
extension can be in only one Internal
Paging Group.
02
Internal All Call Paging Receiving
0 = Off
0
1 = On
Allow or prevent All Call Internal Paging for
each extension. If allowed, extension can
place and receive All Call Internal Paging
announcements. If prevented, extensions
can only make (not receive) All Call
Internal Paging announcements. If
combined, Paging zones should be
restricted as well, change the internal page
zone group in Program 31-07-01 to "0".
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Paging, Internal
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 309

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal
Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging.
The system shows the names you program on the telephone displays. Use the
following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press
the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example,
to enter a C, press key "2" three times. Press the key six times display the lower case
letter.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be up to 12
digits long.
Use this keypad
When you want to. . .
digit . . .
1
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
2
Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
,
Enter characters:
, + , - . / : ; < = > ? B E S
¢ £
2 - 310
Program 31 : Paging Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be up to 12
digits long.
Use this keypad
When you want to. . .
digit . . .
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key
are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system
programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept
and/or add a space.)
CONF
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.

Input Data
Internal Paging Group Number
01~64
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
01
Internal Paging
Up to 12 Characters
See
Assign names to Internal Paging Groups
Group Name
default
(i.e., Page Zones). The system shows
table
the names you program on the
below
telephone displays.
02
Internal Paging
0 = Ordinary Volume
0
Allow an extension to have normal (0),
Splash Tone
(Normal)
muted (1) or no (2) Internal Paging alert
1 = Mute
beeps before a Paging announcement.
2 = No Tone (None)
Default
Item 01 : Internal Paging Group Name
Extension
Name
Paging Group
01
Group 1
02
Group 2
:
:
64
Group 64
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 311

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Paging, Internal
2 - 312
Program 31 : Paging Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging
zone to an External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when
broadcasting announcements to the external zone. When programming, the zones on
the PGD(2)-U10 adapter are numbers 1~8. On the Electra Elite IPK II system, the
CPUII's zone is number 9.
To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make the External Paging Zone
Group the same number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.).
Input Data
External Speaker Number
1~9
Item
Paging Group
Default
No.
Number
01
0~8 (0 = No Setting)
Speaker 1 [PGD(2)-U10] = 1 (Group 1)
Speaker 2 [PGD(2)-U10] = 2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3 [PGD(2)-U10] = 3 (Group 3)
Speaker 4 [PGD(2)-U10] = 4 (Group 4)
Speaker 5 [PGD(2)-U10] = 5 (Group 5)
Speaker 6 [PGD(2)-U10] = 6 (Group 6)
Speaker 7 [PGD(2)-U10] = 7 (Group 7)
Speaker 8 [PGD(2)-U10] = 8 (Group 8)
Speaker 9 (CPUII) = 1 (Group 1)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Paging, External
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 313

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer to assign Universal Night Answer
ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port, make a separate entry for
each External Paging zone. When programming, the zones on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP
adapter are numbers 1~8. The CPUII zone is number 9. For UNA ringing, make a
separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
1~200
External Speaker Number
1~9
Item
Day/Night Mode
Input Data
Default
No.
01
1~8
0
= No
0
Ringing
(No)
1
= Ringing
(Yes)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Night Service
J
Paging, External
2 - 314
Program 31 : Paging Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-06 : External Speaker Control
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the
external speaker using an amplifier.
Input Data
External Speaker Number
1~9
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Broadcast Splash Tone Before
0
= No Tone (None)
2
Paging (Paging Start Tone)
1
= Splash Tone
Use this option to enabled or
2
= Chime Tone
disable splash tone before Paging
over an external zone. If enabled,
the system broadcasts a splash
tone before the External Paging
announcement.
02
Broadcast Splash Tone After
0
= No Tone (None)
2
Paging (Paging End Time)
1
= Splash Tone
Use this option to enabled or
2
= Chime Tone
disable splash tone after Paging
over an external zone. If enabled,
the system broadcasts a splash
tone at the end of an External
Paging announcement.
03
Speech Path
0
= Both Way (Duplex)
1
Determine if the external speaker
1
= One Way (PGD -> SPK)
will be used for talkback (As this
(Simplex)
option is not available with the
CPUII external page zone,
speaker 9 should be left at "1".
04
CODEC Transmit Gain Setup
1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
05
CODEC Receive Gain Setup
1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 315

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Paging, External
2 - 316
Program 31 : Paging Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging
Group (0~8) to an Internal Paging Zone (0~64) for Combined Paging. When an
extension user makes a Combined Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the
External and Internal Zone.
Use Program 31-04-01 to assign an External Paging Zone (1~9) to an External Page
Group (1~8).
Input Data
External Paging Group Number
0~8 (0 = All External Paging)
Item
Internal Paging
Default
No.
Group Number
01
0~64
1
(0 = All internal
paging)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Paging, External
J
Paging, Internal
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 317

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-08 : BGM on External Paging
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option
for each External Paging zone. If enabled, the system will play Background Music
over the zone when it is idle.
When programming, the zones on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP adapter are numbers 1~8.
The CPUII zone is number 9.
Input Data
External Speaker Number
1~9
Item
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
BGM
Use this option to allow or prevent the
0
= Disable
0
External Paging zone you select from
(No)
broadcasting Background Music when it
1
= Enable
is idle.
(Yes)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Background Music
J
Paging, External
2 - 318
Program 31 : Paging Setup

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers to assign the timers used for the Door
Box.
Program

The Door Box feature is referred to as "Door Phone" when programming via
Web Pro and using a Multiline Terminal.
Input Data
32
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Door Box Answer Time
0~64800
30
A multiline user must answer Door Box chimes within this
interval.
02
Door Lock Cancel Time
0~64800
10
When a single line (2500 type) telephone user hook
flashes or a multiline user presses the Recall key while
talking to a Door Box, the strike stays open for this interval.
03
Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box Disconnect
0~64800
60
Timer
Define the conversation period for an Off-Premise Call
Forward by Door Box call. When this timer expires, the
caller will hear busy tone for 3 seconds (fixed timer) and
the call will then be disconnected.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Door Box
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 319

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignments to assign the extension which
will ring when a caller presses the associated Door Box call button.

The Door Box feature is referred to as "Door Phone" when programming via Web Pro
and using a Multiline Terminal.
Input Data
Door Box Number
1~8
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Item
Door Box Ring
Extension
Default
No.
Group Number
Number
01
01~32
Maximum 8
No
Digits
Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Door Box
2 - 320
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain
level for each Door Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are
defined in Program 80-01.

The Door Box feature is referred to as "Door Phone" when programming via Web Pro
and using a Multiline Terminal.
Input Data
Door Box Number
1~8
Item
Item
Input Data
Default
No.
01
Chime Pattern
0
= None
Door Box 1 = 1
1
= Door Box Ring 1
Door Box 2 = 2
2
= Door Box Ring 2
Door Box 3 = 3
3
= Door Box Ring 3
Door Box 4 = 4
4
= Door Box Ring 4
Door Box 5 = 5
5
= Door Box Ring 5
Door Box 6 = 6
6
= Door Box Ring 6
Door Box 7 = 1
Door Box 8 = 1
02
CODEC Transmit Gain Setup
1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
(PGD to Door Box)
03
CODEC Receive Gain Setup
1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
(Door Box to PGD)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Door Box
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 321

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 322
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup to set the function of each
software port on an Analog Communications Interface. Each ACI software port
can have only one function (input, output or none).
Program
Input Data
ACI Port Number
01~96
33
Item
ACI Type
Default
No.
01
0
= None
2
1
= MOH/BGM
(Input)
2
= External
Audio Port
(Input/
Output)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 323

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group to assign ACI ports to
Department Groups. An ACI port can only be in one group.
Also use this program to set the ACI port's priority. When a call comes into the ACI
Department Group, it connects to the ACI port in order of their priority. A higher priority
port (e.g., 1) receives calls before a lower priority port (e.g., 6). There are 96 ACI
ports and 16 ACI Department Groups available.
Input Data
ACI Port Number
01~96
Item
Group
Priority
No.
Number
01
01~16
1~96
Default
ACI Port
Group
Priority
01
1
1
02
1
2
:
:
:
96
1
96
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 324
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to defines the basic settings
for each E&M Tie line.
Program
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
34
Item
Related
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No.
Program
01
DID/E&M Start
0
=
2nd dial tone
1
Set the start signaling mode for
22-02
Signaling
1
=
Wink
DID and tie trunks. DID and tie
2
=
Immediate
trunks can use either
3
=
Delay
immediate start or wink start
signaling.
02
--- Not Used ---
03
E&M Dial-In Mode
0
=
Specify Extension
0
Determine if the incoming Tie
22-11
Number (Intercom)
Line call should be directed as
1
=
Use conversion
an intercom call or if it should
table (NTT)
follow the DID Translation
Table in Program 22-11.
04
E&M Line Dial Tone
0
=
Disable (No)
1
Enter 1 if the Tie Line should
1
=
Enable (Yes)
send dial tone to the calling
system once the call is set up.
Enter 0 if the Tie Line should
not send dial tone.
05
System Toll
0
=
No
0
Determine if an incoming Tie
Restriction
1
=
Yes
Line call should be subject to
Toll Restriction.
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 325

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Tie Lines
2 - 326
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to
a Tie line (there are 15 Tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are
defined in Program 20-14. For each Tie line, make a separate entry for each Night
Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
1~200
Item
Day/Night
Related
Class
Default
No.
Mode
Program
01
1~8
1~15
1
20-14
Conditions
H Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Tie Lines
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 327

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk
group route 1~8 or 1~100) chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. (Set
Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-07.) If the system has Automatic Route
Selection, dialing 9 accesses ARS. Make a separate entry for each Tie Line - for
each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Day/Night
Route Table
Default
No.
Mode
Number
01
1~8
0~100
1
(0 = Setting)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
J
Tie Lines
2 - 328
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction
Class for each Tie Line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in
Programs 21-05 and 21-06. For each Tie Line, you make a separate Toll Restriction
Class entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
Day/Night
Toll Restriction
Related
Default
No.
Mode
Class
Program
01
1~8
1~15
2
21-05
14-01-08
Conditions
H Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines.
Feature Cross Reference
J
Tie Lines
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
2 - 329

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix
for outgoing trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a Tie L